Page 1
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
OPERATION
I. Introduction
GSK928TC Turning CNC system, realized high-speed ìm-precision control with highspeed CPU and CPLD
as its control part, has 320×240 lattice graphic LCD with friendly Chinese/English menu, fullscreen edition,
realtime tool-trail graphic display. It runs the user program with international standard CNC language-ISO code. It
is widely suitable for response stepmotor driver, complex stepmotor driver and servomotor driver. By the
programming, it makes the machine to cut cylinder, end, slot, taper, arc, thread and so on.
II. Specification
2.1 Controllable axes 2 axes (X Z axis)
2.2 Linkage axes 2 axes (X Z axis)
2.3 Min. enactment unit 0.001 mm
2.4 Min. move unit X axis 0.0005 mm Z axis 0.001 mm
2.5 Max program travel 8000.000 mm
2.6 Max move speed 15000 mm/min
2.7 Cuting speed 5-6000 mm/min
2.8 User Data Storage 24KB
2.9 Max program numbers 100
2.10 Graphic LCD 320 240 lattice
2.11 Communication interface standard RS-232
2.12 Controllable tool positions 4 extendable to 8
III. OPERATION PANEL
ＭＧ
Ｘ Ｚ ７ ８ ９
ＲＩＥ
ＤＬＮ
改写
ＲＥＷ
自动
ＡＵＴＯ
ＷＵ
Ｋ
／Ｐ
删除
参数
ＰＡＲ
１
．
退出
ＥＳＣ
Ｘ
Ｚ
刀补
ＯＦＴ
２ ３
０ －
输入
ＩＮＰＵＴＤＥＬ
诊断
ＤＧＮ
６５４
回车
ＥＮＴＥＲ
ＴＳ
Ｆ
空运行
单段
ＳＩＮＧＬＥ
手动
ＪＯＧ
单步
ＳＴＥＰ
ＤＲＹ
编辑
ＥＤＩＴ
Ｘ
Ｘ
Ｚ
Ｈ／Ｌ
Ｚ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 1
Page 2
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Instructions of the GSK928TC turning CNC system panel:
3.1 LCD display: 320x240 lattice distinguishability, the communication interface between the machine and
human.
3.2 Digit button: input all kinds of data (0~9).
3.3 Address button: input letters, addresses, segments and programs.
3.4 Funtion button: this system was designed with the visualized symbol function button according to the
standard ‘the visualized symbols of CNC machine tool’ as follows:
Fast multiple increase button: Increase the multiple of the max move speed on JOG mode. Increase
the speed multiple of dictate G00 on AUTO mode.
Fast multiple decrease button: Decrease the multiple of the max move speed on JOG mode.
Decrease the speed multiple of dictate G00 on AUTO mode.
Feed multiple increase button : Increase the feed speed multiple on JOG mode. Increase the speed
multiple of dictate G01 on AUTO mode.
Feed multiple decrease button : Decrease the feed speed multiple on JOG mode. Decrease the speed
multiple of dictate G01 on AUTO mode.
Ｘ
X axis returnning to program reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG/AUTO mode
Ｚ
Z axis returnning to program reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG/AUTO mode
Ｘ
X axis returnning to machine reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG mode
(Whether the machine reference point is valid can be defined by the MZRO bit of the parameter P12)
Ｚ
Z axis returnning to machine reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG mode
(Whether the machine reference point is valid can be defined by the MZRO bit of the parameter P12)
空运行
Dry run button: When the dry run is selected on AUTO mode, neither the coordinates of the
Ｄｒｙ
machine move nor the S , M, T functions run if the program starts. On EDIT mode, it moves the cursor
to the the first character following this line number
单段
Single button: to select the single segment run/continuum run on the AUTO mode
Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ
编辑
Edit button: to select the edit operation mode
ＥＤＩＴ
手动
JOG button: to select manual operation mode
ＪＯＧ
AUTO button: to select auto operation mode
自动
PAR button: to select parameter operation mode
参数
刀补
OFT button: to select tool offset operation mode
DGN button: to select diagnosis operation mode
诊断
2 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 3
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
3.5 Edit button /State-selection button
改写
Ｒｅｗ
Switch between the inset and rewrite ways on the edit mode.
删除
Ｄｅｌ
Delete the figure, letter, segment, or whole the program.
退出
Ｅｓｃ
Cancel the local inputing data or escape from local state.
输入
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
Input all kinds of data, select the needed edition, run the program or establish the new user
program.
回车
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
Confirm the input.
Page up to searches the program or parameter on the edit/parameter/tool offset mode, or
increase the brightness to the display on the other modes.
Page down to searches the program or parameter on the edit/parameter/tool offset mode, or
decrease the brightness to the display on the other modes.
Move the cursor up on the edit/parameter/tool offset mode
Move the cursor down on the edit/parameter/tool offset mode
Move the cursor ahead on the edit/parameter/tool offset mode
Move the cursor backwards on the edit/parameter/tool offset mode
3.6 Loop start button and Feed-hold button
Start the program to run on the AUTO mode, pause on the operation
Loop start button Start the program to run automatically on the AUTO mode.
Feed-hold button The motors slow down to pause on the AUTO or JOG mode
3.7 Manual axis-control button
Move the selected axis along the moving direction on the JOG mode
Move the x axis along negative direction on JOG mode.
Move the x axis along positive direction on JOG mode.
Move the z axis along negative direction on JOG mode.
Move the z axis along positive direction on JOG mode.
GSK CNC Equipment Company 3
Page 4
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Fast move/Feed button Switch between fast move speed and feed speed in JOG.
JOG step select button Select the step of the monostep feed or handwheel feed in Single
feed/handwheel feed mode.
X axis Handwheel select button Select handwheel to control X axis when this system
Ｘ
assembled the handwheel.
Z axis Handwheel select button Select handwheel to control Z axis when this system
Ｚ
assembled the handwheel.
单步
Single/JOG mode Switch between the manual monostep and jog mode.
3.8 Manual Toolchange and Assistant Functions Buttons
Select the next tool position directly and manage the machine to run all assistant function. The buttons are
defined as follows:
Spindle stop button The spindle stops running when push this button.
Coolant button Switch the coolant on/off
Tool change button Select the next tool postion when push this button once.
Remark: All above buttons are efficient in JOG/AUTO mode when X,Z axes stop. But onlythecoolant
Ｓｔｅｐ
Spindle positive rotation button The spindle rotates counter-clockwise (watch from the motor
shaft) by pushing this button.
Spindle negative rotation button The spindle rotates clockwise (watch from the motor shaft) by
pushing this button.
Spindle shift button Select the spindle speed when the main spindle motor has more then one
step speed (not more then 16 steps) and the machine has the control loop.
button is efficient in running.
3.9 Reset Button
System reset button All axes will stop when this system resets, and all output of assistant
functions are inefficacy, the machine stops running and return to the initial status of
electrification.
3.10 State indicator
Indicate the current running state of this CNC system. There have 15 function buttons with LED
indicators. The corresponding function of this button is availability when the LED indicator lights.
4 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 5
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
IV. SYSTEM OPERATION
In this chapter, details the all functions modules of this GSK928TC turning CNC system and their operations
and notices. Please read this chapter carefully before start the machine with this system.
4.1 System turn on/off
There has not the power switch on this system. To avoid the power concussion, install the power switch for
this system according to the actual state of the machine.
Turn on as follows:
１ Power on the machine’s electrical source first.
２ Put through the system’s switch if there has, and then the system appears as picture1. Keep pushing any
button with the exception of the buttons , , when it is displaying the picture1, the
system will display the version number of this system. After release the button, the system enters the
normal run state.
Turn off as follows:
1 Cut off the system’s switch if there has.
２ Power off the machine’s electrical source.
CAUTION: When the system powers on first, it is needed usually to operate as follows:
1. Initialize the system’s parameter section such as:
Push the button and at the same time . First release the button , after 3 seconds, release the
button , the system was initialized. At then, all the parameters of tool offset are 0, all the parameters of the
machine reset as initial value. Please consult the offset and parameter instruction in this manual.
2. Measure the reverse transmission clearance of X, Z axes, and enter system parameters P07 and P08. Please consult
the parameters instruction in this manual.
3. Define the DIRZ and DIRX in parameter P11 according to the electric design and motor direction of the machine.
4. Adjust the parameters P05, P06, P17~P22 to let the machine run reposefully and availably according to the
machine’s load.
删除
Del
删除
Del
广 州 数 控
Picture1. System initial display
4.2 System run mode selection
Select or change the run mode of GSK928TC by push button directly. It is maneuverable, convenient and
directviewing.
If no one of button is pushed, this system displays the picture1 circularly when it powers on. If any button
except button was pushed, this system will return to the mode of last power off. If power on with pushing
button or push button and button at the same time, release first, a moment later,
releases the button , this system will enter the MANUAL mode.
退出
Esc
退出
Esc
GSK CNC Equipment Company 5
退出
Esc
Page 6
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
4.3 EDIT Mode
On EDIT mode, input or edit the cutting programs and their contents by pushing buttons on the keyboard. All
the cutting programs can be built, selected or deleted by the keyboard. And the contents of the selected cutting
program can be edited such as inset, amend, deleted and so on. And the RS232 communication port of this system
can be connected to the serial port of the current pc, so the cutting program can be exchanged between this system
and the current pc.
Push the button to enter EDIT mode, this system appears the names of all stored program, bytes of the
编辑
ＥＤＩＴ
current programs and the spare capability of this system as follows:
%00 %02 %03 %04 %10
PROG. NO. 05 FREE BYTE 15750
EEDDIIT
EDIT %02 0223
T MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
Picture2 edit mode
On the EDIT mode, the definitions and usage s of the buttons
1 Upmove cursor button
The cursor moves to the position of the first charater after front program row number when push this
button once.
Keep pushing this button, the cursor continues to move above until the cursor arrives at the first program
row or the button is released.
2 Downmove cursor button
The cursor moves to the position of the first charater after next program row number when push this button
once.
Keep pushing this button, the cursor continues to move down until the cursor arrives at the last program
row or the button is released.
3 Leftmove cursor button
The cursor moves to the position of the front charater when push this button once.
Keep pushing this button, the cursor continues to move left until the cursor arrives at the first charater or the
button is released.
４ Ｒｉｇｈｔｍｏｖｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
The cursor moves to the position of the next charater when push this button once.
Keep pushing this button, the cursor continues to move right until the cursor arrives at the last charater or the
button is released.
CAUTIONS: Cursor – Pompt of Local editing position. There have two forms:
A On inset mode, the cursor is a line segment under the charater.
B On rewrite mode, the cursor appers such that the charater is displayed with highlight and color inverse.
The cursor forms can be switched by button .
6 GSK CNC Equipment Company
改写
Rew
Page 7
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
编辑
once, and the cursor forms will switch accordingly. On inset mode, the cursor is a flashing line segment. On rewrite
mode, the cursor appers such that the charater is displayed with a flashing highlight square charater.
pushing Input button, and inputing the serial number with two digits.
改写
５ Ｉｎ ｓｅｔ／ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ Ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Rew
Push the Inset/rewrite button once, then the input modes will switch between inset and rewrite mode
输入
６ Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
To establish a new program, select a existent program or delete a existent program or all programs by
７ Ｐａｇｅｕｐ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Push this button to display the front page when search serial numbers list or program contents,
８ Ｐａｇｅｄｏｗｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Push this button to display the next page when search serial numbers list or program contents,
Ｕ
9 Double-functions button
Ｗ Ｉ
／
Ｅ
Ｋ
Ｐ
Ｄ Ｒ
Ｎ Ｌ
Each button can be defined two functions. Push these buttons once, the system performs the first
function: U, W, I, K, D, and R. Push these button twice in series, the system performs the second functions: /,
E, P, N, L, and . If push these button continuously, the system switches between the two functions. ‘/’ is
newline prompt, ‘ ’ is blank.
4.3.1 Search the cutting program list
On EDIT mode, list all the nemes of the cutting programs in the system’s storage, the cutting program
numbers and the spare capability.
Push button on EDIT mode, or push button or button in editing, the system displays
as PICTURE3.
EDIT
退出
Esc
%00 %02 %03 %04 %10
PROG. NO. 05 FREE BYTE 15750
PICTURE3 Program search, establish, select, delete and etc.
EEDDIIT
EDIT %02 0223
T MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
输入
Input
40 pcs program names can be displayed once. If the displayed program names are more then 40 pcs, the
display will be paging. Push the button , it displays the next page. Push the button , it displays the
front page.
4.3.2 Cutting program’s establish, selection, deletion, rename, and copy
Ｔｈｅ establish, selection, deletion, rename, and copy of cutting program can be processed on the program list
display state or program content display state
On the program list display state, push the button , the system displays ‘INPUT PROG. NO. %’ to
prompt the program’s number.
GSK CNC Equipment Company 7
输入
Input
Page 8
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
05 FREE BYTE 15750
4.3.2.1 Establish a new cutting program
1. On the program list display state, push the button .
2. Input the 2 bits program number that isn’t existent in the system as PICTURE 4.
输入
Input
3. Push button Enter
4. The new program is established, the system enters the program content edit state automatically.
Ex. Establish the program%20, push the button then input digit buttons 2 0 , and put the
输入
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
button Enter. New program %20 is established, and the system turns to edit the new program %20 automatically
as PICTURE 5.
%00 %02 %03 %04 %10
INPUT PROG. NO. %20 Enter
PROG. NO. 05 FREE BYTE 15750
EEDDIIT
EDIT %02 0223
N0000 _
T MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
EDIT %20 0007
PICTURE 4 INPUT THE PROGRAM NUMBER PICTURE 5 ESTABLISH A NEW PROGRAM
4.3.2.2 Delete the cutting program
1. On the program list display state, push the button .
2. Input the program number that needs to be deleted.
3. Push button , then the system displays DEL?
删除
Del
4. Push button Enter to delete the program, or not, push any button except for Enter to escape.
Ex. Delete the program %03 , Push button Enter, input the digits 0 , 3 , then push button and
button Enter, the program %03 is deleted from the storage of this system as PICTURE 6.
%00 %02 %03 %04 %10
INPUT PROG. NO. %03 DEL?
PROG. NO.
EEDDIIT
EDIT %02 0223
T MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
PICTURE 6 DELETE THE CUTTING PROGRAM
输入
Input
删除
Del
8 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 9
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
4.3.2.3 Select a cutting program
1. On the program list display state, push the button .
2. Input the program number that needs to be selected.
输入
Input
3. Push button Enter
4. Select the cutting program and the system displays the program contents, and it can be edited.
Ex. Select cutting program %01. Push button , input the digits 0, 1 then push button ENTER, the
输入
Input
program %01 is selected as PICTURE 7.
N0000 G0 X0 Z0
N0010 G1 X4.80 Z9.6 F500
N0020 G0 X0.0 Z00
N0030 G4 D2
N0040 M20
EDIT %01 0082
PICTURE 7 SELECT A CUTTING PROGRAM
Cautions:
1. This NC system automatically establishes and selects a new cutting program %00 if there has not any cutting
program or program content when the system powers on first.
2. After a cutting program is selected, it will stands in current state until the other program is selected, even if the
system powers off.
4.3.2.4 Output of the cutting program
Output the cutting program stored in the system’s storage to the external pc.
1. Connect the communication cable between the system and external pc when the system powers off.
2. The system powers on and enters the EDIT mode.
3. Select the cutting program that need to be output (It doesn’t need to be selected if the program to be sent
out is current).
4. Push button W, it prompts ‘PREPARE TO SEND ’.
5. Start the GSK928TC communication program in the external pc to the receiving state. (Please refer to the
appendix of the <Operation Instruction of the GSK928TC Communication Program>).
6. Afer the external pc is convinced that it is in the receiving state, push button Enter, the system prompts
‘SENDING…’, and it send the cutting program to the external pc.
7. As soon as the system sends out the program, it prompts ‘SENT OUT’, and then push any button to
return to the EDIT mode.
8. Push button to interrupt the program sending.
退出
Esc
4.3.2.5 Input of the cutting program
Input the cutting program from the external pc to this system.
1. Connect the communication cable between the system and external pc when the system powers off.
2. The system powers on and enters the EDIT mode.
3. Select the cutting program that need to be output (It doesn’t need to be selected if the program to be sent
out is current).
4. Push button R, it prompts ‘PREPARE TO RECEIVE’.
GSK CNC Equipment Company 9
Page 10
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
5. Start the GSK928TC communication program in the external pc to the receiving state. (Please refer to the
appendix of the <Operation Instruction of the GSK928TC Communication Program>).
6. Afer the external pc is convinced that it is prepared, push button Enter, the system prompts
‘RECEIVE…’, and it send the cutting program to the external pc.
7. As soon as the system sends out the program, it prompts ‘RECEIVED’, and then push any button to
return to the EDIT mode.
8. Push button to interrupt the program receiving.
退出
Esc
Cautions:
1. When the cutting program is sent from the external pc to this system, this system makes the program name with
the character string ‘%xx” in the first row. If the name of the received program is same as the stored program,
the name and contents of the received program can’t be displayed. So the stored program with same name must
be deleted first before check the new program.
２．
All the cutting programs can be exchanged as above method between GSK928TC systems. Just operate two
GSK928TC systems with input/output mode.
4.3.2.6 Delete all cutting programs
Delete all cutting program in the CNC system once.
1. Push button on the EDIT mode.
2. Input
3. Push button , then the system display DEL? .
4. Push button , the all programs in storage will be deleted, or not, push any other button to return to
the EDIT mode without any change.
输入
Ｏ
删除
Del
回车
by keyboard.
4.3.2.7 Rename the cutting program
Rename the local cutting program.
1. Push button , display % .
输入
Input
2. Input a new program number inexistent in this system, and push button , and then the inputted
改写
program name is instead of the local program number.
Example: Change the file name %00 to %05
Ｐｕｓｈ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｎｄ ｉｎｐｕｔ 0 5 ，ｔｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｎａｍｅ．
输入
Input
改写
4.3.2.8 Copy the cutting program
Copy the contents of the local program to another program and the new program will be regarded as the local
program.
1. Pree button , display %,
2. Input the program number inexistent in this system, push button , copy the contents of local
program to the program with the inputted program number, and the new program is regarded as the local
program.
输入
Input
输入
Input
10 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 11
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Example: Copy the contents of the local program %00 to the local program %05
Push button , intput 0 5 ,and then push button to finish copy.
输入
Input
输入
Input
Caution: If the inputted program number existed in the system, the system display ＥＸＩＳＴＥＤ．Push any button
to escape, then input the other program number inexistent in this system, push button .
回车
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
4.3.3 Input and edit the contents of the cutting program
This CNC system automatically runs according to the sequence of the cutting programs inputted by
user. The program consists of some program segments. The segment consists of serial number, dictate, data
and so on. Only correctly input the contents of the cutting program in the light of the cutting technics, the
system can run normally.
The edit model of this system is full screen. The programs are managed as documents.
4.3.3.1 Create the serial number automatically
Every program consists of some program segment. And each segement begans at N**** . After a
new program is built, the system will create the first serial numbe as N0000 . And when push button
Enter after inputted a segment, the system will create the next serial number automatically. The increment of
the serial number in program input is set by the parameter P23. The parameter P23 can create the serial
number with the integer of the 1/4 increment.
Create the serial number of segment as PICTURE 8 (Parameter P16 is 10):
N0000 G0 X0 Z0 <
N0010 G1 X4.8 Z9.0 F500<
N0020 G0 X0.0 Z0.0 <
N0030 G4 D2 <
NOTE: The Enter and Esc in above picture aren’t displayed on the screen
PICTURE 8 SERIAL NUMBER CREATION AND PROGRAM CONTENT INPUT
N0040 M20 <
EDIT %01 0082
Ｅｎｔｅｒ＞
Ｅｓｃ＞
Ｅｎｔｅｒ＞
Ｅｎｔｅｒ＞
Ｅｎｔｅｒ＞
4.3.3.2 The program contents input
Edits of this system is on the full screen mode. The program contents were inputted on the EDIT mode.
1. Setup a new program as Chapter 4.3.2.1;
2. Input the contents of the first program row after the Serial Number
Ｎ００００
is displayed;
3. Push the button Enter to end the input of this row after this row was inputted;
4. The next Serial Number is created automatically after push button Enter , then the new row can be
inputted;
5. Push the button
NOTE： Only ahead 40 characters can be displayed in every segment if there has more then 40 characters in the segment.
When push the button once, the displayed characters indent one bit to left. There can’t be more then 255 characters in
one row, or not the inputted contents can be accepted. The 13 segments can be displayed in one screen. The segment will move
up automatically after the segments are more then 13 rows.
Ｅｓｃ
to end the input after the all contents of the program were inputted.
GSK CNC Equipment Company 11
Page 12
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
4.3.3.3 Insert the program segment insert
Insert one segment or more between two program segments.
1. Push the button or to move the cursor to the frontal one in the two segments;
2. Keep pushing the button as far as the cursor arrives at the last character, or push the button to
move the cursor to the last character;
3. Push the button
increment is set by the integer part of 1/4 the parameter No. P16. If the numbers are no enough, the next
segment number can be rewrited artificially;
4. Input the contents of the inputted segment;
5. The segment was inserted, except push the button
NOTE 1: Insert the segment after the last segment, push the button directly, the new serial number will be created
automatically.
NOTE 2: A new segment can’t be inserted in front of the first segment directly. If it is necessarily, only rewrite the first
segment with new segment contents, and then insert the contents of the foregoing first segment thereafter.
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ：
1. Push the button or to move the cursor to the segment
the characters
2. Push the button Enter , a new serial number N0022 was created such as PICTURE 9, and the cursor
points to the first character of the new segment;
3. Input M 3 ;
3. the new segment was inserted as PICTURE 10.
N0000 G0 X0 Z0
N0010 G1 X4.80 Z9.6 F500
N0020 G0 X0.0 Z0.0
N0022 __
N0030 G4 D2
N0040 M20
PICTURE 9 PICTURE 10
The segment M3 needs to be inserted between the segments N0020 and N0030 such as
the Picture 8, operate as follows:
EDIT %01 0089
Ｅｎｔｅｒ , a new Serial Number is created between these two segments ( The number
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
to input the next inputted segments,
Ｎ００２０
, then push the button after
Ｚ０．０；
EDIT %01 0091
N0000 G0 X0 Z0
N0010 G1 X4.80 Z9.6 F500
＜ Ｅ ｎｔｅｒ＞
N0020 G0 X0.0 Z0.0
N0022 M 3
N0030 G4 D2
N0040 M20
单步
ＳＴＥＰ
单步
Ｓｔｅｐ
4.3.3.4 Delete the program segment
Ｄｅｌｅｔ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｉｎｃｌｕｄｉｎｇ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
１． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ；
２． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ａｔ ｔｈｅ Ｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
３． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ；
４． Ｗｈｏｌｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗａｓ ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ．
4.3.3.5 Insert the field in the segment
１． Ｃｈｅｃｋ ｉｆ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｏｎ ＩＮＳＥＲＴ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｏｎ ＩＮＳＥＲＴ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ ａｎ
12 GSK CNC Equipment Company
删除
Del
Page 13
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｕｎｄｅｒｌｉｎｅ． Ｏｒ ｎｏｔ， ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
２． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ａｆｔｅｒ ｉｎｓｅｒｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ；
３． Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｉｎｓｅｒｔｅｄ
４． Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔｔｅｄ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｗｅｒｅ ｉｎｓｅｒｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ．
改写
Rew
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： Ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｘ
ＮＯＴＥ： Ｅａｃｈ ｆｉｅｌｄ （ａ ｌｅｔｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｔ ｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｆｉｇｕｒｅｓ） ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｂｌｏｃｋｅｄ ｏｆｆ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｓｐａｃｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐａｃｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ． Ｂｕｔ ｗｈｅｎ ｉｎｓｅｒｔ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒｓ， ｔｈｅ ｆｉｅｌｄ
ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｐａｃｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎｐｕｔｔｅｄ ｍａｎｕａｌｌｙ ｔｏ ｅｎｓｕｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｔｅｇｒａｌｉｔｙ
ｏｇ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
Ｎ００２０ Ｇ０ Ｘ０．０ Ｚ０．０
ａｎｄ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ
4.3.3.6 Delete the field in the segment
１
ｎｅｅｄｓ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｉｎｓｅｒｔｅｄ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒｓ Ｘ ａｎｄ Ｏ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ
， Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｕｎｄｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ
１
， Ｎｏｗ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎ００２０ Ｇ０ Ｘ１０．０ Ｚ０．０．
０
ａｆｔｅｒ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ
Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｅｄｌｅｓｓ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
１． Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ
２． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ．
4.3.3.7 Amend the segment’s contents
删除
Ａｍｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ’ｓ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｗｏ ｍｅｔｈｏｄｓ （Ｉｎｓｅｒｔ／ Ｒｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ）．
Ｉｎ Ｉｎｓｅｒｔ Ｍｏｄｅ， ａｍｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｂｙ ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ａｎｄ ｉｎｓｅｒｔ．
１． Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ
２． Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ
３． Ｔｈｅｎ ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｅｄｌｅｓｓ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ
Ｉｎ Ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ Ｍｏｄｅ， ａｍｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ．
１． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ． （Ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｉｓ
改写
Rew
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ ｓｑｕａｒｅ；
２． Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ；
３． Ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ａｆｔｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ ａ ｎｅｗ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ．
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： Ｒｅｐｌａｃｅ Ｘ ｗｉｔｈ Ｕ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎ００２０ Ｇ０ Ｘ ０．０ Ｚ０．０
１． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ Ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ Ｍｏｄｅ
２． Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ Ｘ
３． Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ Ｕ
Ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎ００２０ Ｇ０ Ｕ ０ ．０ Ｚ０．０
ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ．
4.3.3.8 Overleap the segment
Ｉｆ ｉｎｓｅｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ／ ｉｎ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｓｅｒｉａｌ Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ Ｎ ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｏｖｅｒｌｅａｐｐｅｄ
ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｒｕｎｓ ｔｈｉｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
１． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ Ｉｎｓｅｒｔ Ｍｏｄｅ
２． Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｏｖｅｒｌｅａｐｐｅｄ， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｔｅｒ Ｎ
３． ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｎ ／
ｔｗｉｃｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｉｓ ｉｎｓｅｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ Ｕ ｉｎ ｆｒｏｎｔ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ Ｎ ，ｔｈｅ ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｉｓ ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ Ｕ ｔｏ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ／
GSK CNC Equipment Company 13
Page 14
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X 0090. 000
Z 0125. 000
手动
4.4 JOG Mode (Manu Mode?)
Ｉｎ ＪＯＧ Ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅｍｅｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ’ｓ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ， ｔｈｅ ｓｔｏｐ ａｎｄ ｓｔａｒｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ， ｔｏｏｌ ｃｈａｎｇｅ， ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｎｄ ｍｅｃｈａｎｉｃ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｄ ｂｙ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ．Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ＪＯＧ Ｍｏｄｅ （Ｍａｎｕ Ｍｏｄｅ？）． Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ
ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｍｏｄｅ ｉｓ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ＪＯＧ ａｎｄ Ｓｔｅｐ Ｍｏｄｅ．Ｉｆ
ｔｈｅ Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｉｓ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ． Ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ． Ｔｈｅ
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ ｉｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １１ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
JOG
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １１ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ Ｆｅｅｄ
单步
Step
MANUAL JOG
ＭＡＮＵＡＬ ＪＯＧ
ａｎｄ
ＭＡＮＵＡＬ ＳＴＥＰ
4.4.1 Jog in JOG Mode
Ｋｅｅｐ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓ ｔｏ
ｍｏｖｅ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｔｈａｔ ｗａｓ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ ｕｎｔｉｌ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ ｒｅｌｅａｓｅｄ． Ｉｔ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ
ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｐｒｅｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｅｄ． Ｔｈｅ Ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
Move the x axis along negative direction.
Move the x axis along positive direction.
Move the z axis along negative direction.
Move the z axis along positive direction.
4.4.2 Step feed in JOG mode
Ｉｎ Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓｔｅｅｐ Ｆｅｅｄ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎｃｅ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｍｏｖｅｓ
ｏｎｅ ｐｒｅｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｅｄ ｓｔｅｐ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｋｅｅｐ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ，
ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｔｅｐ ｕｎｔｉｌ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｓｔｅｐ ｉｓ ａｃｈｉｅｖｅｄ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｉｓ ｒｅｌｅａｓｅｄ． Ｒｅｆ． ＰＩＣＵＴＲＥ １２．
14 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 15
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X 0090. 000
Z 0125. 000
X 0000. 000
Z 0000. 000
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
MANUALSTEP 0.001
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １２ Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓｔｅｅｐ Ｆｅｅｄ
Ｉｎ Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓｔｅｐ Ｆｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｓｔｅｐ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｓ ７ ｇｒａｄｅｓ
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｆｒｏｍ ｏｎｅ ｋｉｎｄ ｏｆ ｓｔｅｐ ｔｏ ａｎｏｔｈｅｒ ｏｒｄｅｒｌｙ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｓｔｅｐ ｆｅｅｄ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ， ｔｈｅ ｕｎｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｄ ｓｔｅｐｓ
ｄｏｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｈｅｌｄ ． Ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓｌｙ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｔｏ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ－ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｇａｉｎ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｔｅｐ
ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｉｎ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｔｈｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｃａｎ ｍｏｖｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎｌｙ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｏｆ
ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｎｄ ｆｅｅｄ－ｈｏｌｄ ｉｓ ｉｎ ａｐｐｒｏｐｒｉａｔｅ ｓｔａｔｅ． Ｉｎ ｆｅｅｄ－ｈｏｌｄ ｓｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｄｏｅｓ ｎｏｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ
ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｉｓ ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｉｎ Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｓｔｅｐ ｆｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ － ｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ－ｈｏｌｄ
ｓｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｗｉｌｌ ｒｅｄｕｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｐ ｅｅｄ ｔｏ ｓｔｏｐ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｕｎｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｄ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｄｏｎ
4.4.3 Handwheel Control Mode
Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｕｒｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ Ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ Ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ｔｏ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ （ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ）：
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
HANDWHEEL X 0.001
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
０．００１ ０． ０１ ０．１ １．０ １０．０ ５０．０
’
ｔ ｂｅ ｈｅｌｄ．
１． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｍｏｖｅｄ ｂｙ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ， ｔｕｒｎ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ
Ｔｕｒｎ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｃｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ， ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
Ｔｕｒｎ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｗｉｔｈｅｒｓｈｉｎｓ， ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
２． Ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｕｎｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｈａｓ ｔｈｒｅｅ ｇｒａｄｅｓ ０．００１，０．０１，０．１ｍｍ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｔｏ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｆｒｏｍ ｏｎｅ ｇｒａｄｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｏｎｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓｔｅｐ ｆｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｇｒａｄｅ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｔｈｅ ｅｎａｃｔｍｅｎｔ．
GSK CNC Equipment Company 15
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １３ Ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ
Page 16
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｎｏｔ ｂｅ ｍｏｒｅ ｔｈｅｎ ５ ｒｅｖ／ｓｅｃｏｎｄ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｆ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｏｔ
ａｃｃｏｒｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｃａｌｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ， ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｒｅｌａｔｖｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ａｘｉｓ ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ ＪＯＧ， Ｒｅｓｅｔ， ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ／ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ
ｍｏｖｅｍｅｎｔ ａｒｅ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ Ｓ， Ｍ， Ｔ ａｎｓ ｏｔｈｅｒ ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｔｈｅ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｏｔ ｗｏｒｋ ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｆｅｅｄｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｖａｌｉｄ．
4.4.4 Manual Feedspeed Selection
Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｆｅｅｄ， ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ． （Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ ＦＥＥＤＲＡＴＥ）
Ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｓ ｏｎｅ ｇｒａｄｅ ｗｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎｃｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｉｅｓ
ｉｓ １５０％．
Ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｒｅｄｕｃｅｓ ｏｎｅ ｇｒａｄｅ ｗｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎｃｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｍｉｎ． ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｉｓ
０％．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ ＪＯＧ ｏｒ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ ｆｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｓｅｔｅｄ ｅｘａｃｔｌｙ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｓｔｅｐ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｎｇ．
Ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｉｓ １６ ｇｒａｄｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ ０％ ｔｏ １５０％ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
Ｆ ｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
（ＦＥＥＤＲＡＴＥ）
０ ０
１０ ４．３
２０ １２．６
３０ ２０
４０ ３２
５０ ５０
６０ ７９
７０ １２３
８０ ２００
９０ ３１２
１００ ４２０
１１０ ５３０
１２０ ６００
１３０ ８５０
１４０ １０００
１５０ １２６２
Ｆｅｅｄｓｐｅｅｄ ／
min
4.4.5 Manual quick move speed selection
Ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｍｏｖｅｄ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ． Ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｑｕｉｃｋ
ｍｏｖｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ （Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ ＦＥＳＴＲＡＴＥ） ｗｉｔｈ ｆｏｕｒ ｇｒａｄｅｓ
２５％，５０％，７５％，１００％
．
Ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｏｖｅ ａｎｄ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ．
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ＝ Ｐ０６ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ＝ Ｐ０５ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
16 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 17
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X 0090. 000
Z 0125. 000
Ｔｈｅ ｓｌｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｍａｎｕａｌ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ａｎｄ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ａｒｅ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ ａｎｄ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｏｎｅ ｇｒａｄｅ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｄｕｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｏｎｅ ｇｒａｄｅ．
Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｆｅｅｄ， ｐｕｓｈ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｏ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｍｏｖｅ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｉｎｄｉｃａｔｏｒ ｌｉｇｈｔｓ，
ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ａｎｄ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｉｎｄｉｃａｔｅ ａｓ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ ｓｑｕａｒｅ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｇａｉｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ．
Ｔｈｅ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １４ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ， ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｓｔｅｐ， ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｉｎ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ．
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
Ｐ ｉｃｔｕｒｅ １４ ＭＡＮＵＡＬ ＦＥＥＤ
MANUAL JOG
4.4.6 Define the workpiece coordinate
Ｔｈｉｓ
ＧＳＫ９２８ＴＣ
ｂｅｎｃｈｍａｒｋ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ａｎｄ ｃｏｒｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎ． Ａｓ ｓｏｏｎ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｉｓ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ，
ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｉｒｓｔ． Ａｎｄ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｓｓ ｏｆ ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｓｍ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ
ｕｎａｐｔ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｇａｉｎ．
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
１ Ｉｎｓｔａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｔｒｉａｌ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｒｅｌｉａｂｌｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ａｎｄ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｎｙ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ （ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ
ｔｈｅ ｅａｒｌｉｅｒ ｕｓｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ）
２ Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｅｍｌｙ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅｎ ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ， ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ， ｃｕｔ
ａ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄｅｒ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ．
３ Ｕｎｄｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓａｆｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ
ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ．
４ Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄｅｒ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ，ｔｈｅ
ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｘ ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｓ
ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
５ Ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｇａｉｎ， ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ， ｃｕｔ ａｎ ｅｎｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ．
６ Ｕｎｄｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓａｆｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ
ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ．
ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｄｏｐｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｆｌｏａｔｉｎｇ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｓｃａｌｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ．
ＳＥＴＵＰ Ｘ
输入
Input
， ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｅｔｒｉｃａｌ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ
ＳＥＴＵＰ
ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ，ｔｈｅｎ
７ Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａ ｄａｔｕｍ ｍａｒｋ （ａ ｆｉｘｕｒｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ ｃｈｕｃｋ ｅｎｄ，ｆｒｏｃｋ ｄａｔｕｍ ｐｌａｎｅ），ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 17
Page 18
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｄａｔｕｍ ｍａｒｋ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ ｅｎｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ
Ｚ
， ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｅｔｒｉｃａｌ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
输入
Input
ＳＥＴＵＰ
ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ，ｔｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｚ ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｓ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ
ＳＥＴＵＰ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ， ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔｓ ａｒｅ ｃｌｅａｎｎｅｄ ｏｕｔ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ
ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ， ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｗａｒｐ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｓｃａｌｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ
ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ． Ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ， ｐｌｅａｓｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ．
4.4.7 Define the program reference point
Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｔｈｅ ａｎｙ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ． Ｏｎｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｗｉｌｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｂｙ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ Ｇ２６， Ｇ２７， Ｇ２９ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ
ｔｈｅ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ ａｎｄ ｑｕａｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ａｎｄ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ， ｅｘｃｅｐｔ ｆｏｒ ｄｅｆｉｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｇａｉｎ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ZERO ．Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｇａｉｎ， ｔｈｅ ｐｒｉｍａｒｙ ｓｃａｌｅｓ ａｒｅ ｋｅｐｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ．
Ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｎｅｅｄｓ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｇａｉｎ． Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｖａｌｕｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｉｓ Ｘ＝１５０， Ｚ＝１５０
ＩＮＰＵＴ
ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ SETUP．Ｔｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ０ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ PROGRAM
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ａｇａｉｎ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
4.4.8 The relative coordinate move of the axis
Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｃａｎ ｍｏｖｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｓｔａｇｅ ａｎｄ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ
ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ ｓｔｅｐ．
１． ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｕ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ， ｔｈｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｕ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ， ｔｈｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
２． Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｔａｇｅ ｂｙ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ （ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｆｏｒ ａｘｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ）， ｔｈｅ ｖａｌｕｅ
ｏｆ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ Ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｒｏｎｇ ｉｎｐｕｔ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ．
３． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｅｎｔｅｒ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ RUN ，ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ
ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｓｔａｇｅ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｍｏｖｅ ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ Ｍａｎｕａｌ ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ．
４． Ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｔｉｎｇ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｍｏｖｅｓ １５．８ ｍｍｍ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｐｕｓｈ U – 1 5 . 8 Enter to display RUN ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ
１５．８ｍｍ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｇ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ．
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ．
ＭＯＶＥ Ｗ
．
ＥＳＣ
ＭＯＶＥ Ｕ
ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ
，
4.4.9 The absolute coordinate move of the axis
Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ａｎｙ ａｘｉｓ ｃａｎ ｍｏｖｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ．
１． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｘ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｚ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
２． Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ （ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ） ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｓｔｉｎａｔｉｏｎ ｂｙ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ， ｔｈｅ ｗｒｏｎｇ
ｉｎｐｕｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ ｂｕ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＥＳＣ ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ
ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ．
３． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
18 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ＭＯＶＥ Ｘ
ＭＯＶＥ Ｚ
ｔｏ ｌｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｃａｕｌａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ａｎｄ
．
， ｐｕｓｈ
Page 19
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ RUN . Push the button to move to the appointed position. Push
ESC to stop and return to the Manual Jog mode.
4． It moves with the current defined speed.
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｓｃａｌｅ ｉｓ ５０， ｎｅｅｄ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｏ ８５．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ Z 8 5 Enter to display RUN? , push the button to move
the Z axis to the postion of Z85.
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｏｎｌｙ ｏｎｅ ａｘｉｓ ｃａｎ ｍｏｖｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｅａｒａｎｇｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｔ ｏｎｅ ｔｉｍｅ．
4.4.10 Manual Input and M functions
Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， Ｔｈｅ Ｍ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ ｂｙ ｉｎｐｕｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ Ｍ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ’ ｃｏｄｅ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｍ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ Ｍ， ｉｎｐｕｔ ｏｎｅ ｏｒ ｔｗｏ ｂｉｔ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ Ｍ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ， ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＥＳＣ ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ Ｍ，０，３ ａｎｄ Ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｆｏｒｗａｒｄｓ．
Ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ Ｍ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ：
Ｍ０３ Ｍ０４ Ｍ０５ Ｍ０８ Ｍ０９ Ｍ１０ Ｍ１１ Ｍ３２ Ｍ３３ Ｍ２１ Ｍ２２ Ｍ２３ Ｍ２４
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ ｄｉｇｉｔ ｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ， ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ．
4.4.11 Manual Spindle Control
Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ／ｒｅｖｅｒｓｅ ｔｕｒｎ ａｎｄ ｓｔｏｐ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｄ
ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ．（ｐｌｓ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ Ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ Ｆｅｅｄ／ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｈｉｂｉｔｅｄ ｓｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｄｏｅｓｎ’ｔ ｒｕｎ ｅｖｅｎ
ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｐｕｓｈｅｄ） ．
Spindle positive rotation button The spindle rotates counter -clockwise (watch from the motor shaft)
by pushing this button. Display SPINDLE CW
Spindle stop button The spindle stops running when push this button. Display SPINDLE STOP
Spindle negative rotation button The spindle rotates clockwise (watch from the motor shaft) by
pushing this button. Display SPINDLE CCW
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ＭＳＰ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｔｅｒｅ Ｐ１２， ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ
ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＭＳＰ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｓｔｏｐｓ． Ｉ ｆ ｔｈｅ ＭＳＰ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ．
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ
4.4.12 Manual spindle rev control
Ｆｏｒ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｔｏｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｌｅｖｅｌ ｓｐｅｅｄ， ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ
ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｄｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
l Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＭＤＳＰ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ （ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｌｅｖｅｌ
ｒｅｖ）， Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｌｅｖｅｌ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１．Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ
ＭＤＳＰ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｉｓ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ．
ＳＣＯＤ＝０，ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ， ｅａｃｈ ｂｉｔ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｓ ｔｏ ａ ｓｐｅｅｄ． Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ
４ ｂｉｔｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ｓ０ ｔｏ Ｓ４ ， ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｉｎｅｆｆｅｃｔｉｖｅ．
ＳＣＯＤ＝１，ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｄｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｔｒａｎｓｌａｔｅｄ ｉｎｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｅｒ ｃｉｒｃｕｉｔｒｙ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｃｏｐｅ ｉｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ｓ００ ｔｏ Ｓ１５ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
GSK CNC Equipment Company 19
Page 20
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｃｏｄｅ
ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
ｂｉｔ
Ｓ１
Ｓ２
Ｓ３
Ｓ４
Ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ ｔｏ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｍｂｏｌ ”．
l Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ Ｓ ｃｏｄｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｓ， ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ
ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｄ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｄｅ， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｃｏｄｅ．
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．８ ｓｔｅｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ．
Ｏｒｄｅｒｌｙ ｉｎｐｕｔ S 8
Ｉｎ ａｄｄｉｔｉｏｎ， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏｏ． Ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｉｓ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｃｈａｎｇｅｓ ｉｎ S1 S2 S3 S4 (P11,SCOD=0) or S0~S15(P11,SCOD=1). The
spindle rev switch from S2 to S1 by pushing the button trice when the spindle rev only has two steps.
l Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ ｍｏｔｏｒ ｄｒｉｖｅｓ， ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｓ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ Ｓ， ｔｈｅｎ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ０￣１０Ｖ ｓｉｍｕｌａｔｅ ｖｏｌｔａｇｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ ｉｎｖｅｒｔｏｒ．
l Ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｌｉｎｅｓ． Ｉｎ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｈｅｃｋｅｄ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ． Ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｅ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ｅｘａｃｔｌｙ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｓｔａｒｔｅｄ，
编码器信号错
l Ｔｏ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｒｑｕｅ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｗ ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ， ｓｏｍｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ａｄｏｐｔｓ ｔｅｏ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｇｅａｒｓｈｉｆｔ．
Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｅｒｓ ａ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ＳＨＬ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０９， Ｐ１０． Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ＳＨＬ
ｉｓ ｕｓｅｄ ｔｏ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｇｅａｒｓｈｉｆｔ ｓｔｅｐ． Ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０９ ｉｓ ｕｓｅｄ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｇｇｅｓｔ ｒｅｖ
ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｗ ｇｅａｒｓｈｉｆｔ ｓｔｅｐ． Ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１０ ｉｓ ｕｓｅｄ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｇｇｅｓｔ ｒｅｖ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ
ｈｉｇｈ ｇｅａｒｓｈｉｆｔ ｓｔｅｐ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｔｒａｎｓｌａｔｅｄ ｉｎｔｏ ｔｈｅ
ｓｉｍｕｌａｔｅ ｖｏｌｔａｇｅ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ ｉｎｖｅｒｔｏｒ．
l Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ ０， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｔｉｎｇ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ
ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｍｏｄｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ＭＤＳＰ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２． ＭＤＳＰ＝０， ｍｕｌｔｉｌｅｖｅｌ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＭＤＳＰ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
Ｓ００ Ｓ０１ Ｓ０２ Ｓ０３ Ｓ０４ Ｓ０５ Ｓ０６ Ｓ０７ Ｓ０８ Ｓ０９ Ｓ１０ Ｓ１１ Ｓ１２ Ｓ１３ Ｓ１４ Ｓ１５
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｅｘｐｏｒｔｅｄ
Ｅ ｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ Ｓ８ ｒｅｖ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ 编程转速 S08．
空运行
Dry
ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ，ｐｕｓｈ ａｎｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ．
ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ； ＭＤＳＰ＝１， ０￣１０Ｖ ｓｉｍｕｌａｔｅ ｖｏｌｔａｇｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ．
ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｉｓ ｏｎｌｙ ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔｓ Ｓ１，Ｓ２，Ｓ３，Ｓ４ ，Ｓ０￣Ｓ１５ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｓｈｉｆｔ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｒｅ ｉｎｅｆｆｅｃｔｉｖｅ．
4.4.13 Manual coolant control
Ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｊｏｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｉｓ ｗｏｒｋｉｎｇ， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ＣＯＯＬＡＮＴ ＯＮ
， ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｏｍｅ， ｔｈｅ ＬＥＤ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ ｌｉｇｈｔｅｎｅｄ．
20 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 21
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
4.4.14 Manual Tool-exchange Control
Ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ４ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ． Ｂｙ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｔ１ Ｔ４， ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ８ ｐｏｓｔｉｏｎ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ．
Ｔｈｒｅｅ ｋｉｎｄｓ ｏｆ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ ｍｅｔｈｏｄｓ：
Ｍｅｔｈｏｄ １． Ｉｆ ｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ＭＯＤＴ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ａｓ ０， Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎｃｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ
ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｐｏｓｔｉｏｎ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ．
Ｍｅｔｈｏｄ ２． Ｉｆ ｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ＭＯＤＴ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ａｓ １， Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ ，
ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｐｏｓｔｉｏｎ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｐｕｓｈ ａｎｙ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｅｘｃｅｐｔ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｍｅｔｈｏｄ ３． Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔ ＊ ０ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ ｂｙ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ （＊ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｅｍｐｌｏｙｅｄ）， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ
ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ ｍｅｔｈｏｄ １ ａｎｄ ２， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅｄ， ｂｕｔ ｉｔ ｃａｎ
３， ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ＊， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｅｘｅｃｕｔｅｄ．
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ：
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔ２２， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．２ ｔｏｏｌ ａｎｄ ａｐｐｌｙ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．２ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔ３１， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．３ ｔｏｏｌ ａｎｄ ａｐｐｌｙ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．１ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔ４０， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．４ ｔｏｏｌ ａｎｄ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅ ｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔ００， ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ ａｎｄ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ ｉｓ ｆａｉｌｕｒｅ， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ 刀位号报警 ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｄｏｐｔｓ ｔｈｅ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ， ｓｏ ｅｖｅｒｙ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｉｓ ｉｍｍｏｖａｂｌｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｉｎｓｔａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ， ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ａｃｃｏｒｄａｎｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ４： Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＴＣＯＮ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｌｉｎｅｕｐ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｃｈｏｏｓｅｄ， ｔｈｅｒｅ ｉｓ ｎｏｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ５： Ｉｎ ｍｅｔｈｏｄ ３， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｒｅａｌｉｚｅｄ ｂｙ ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｏｒ ａｍｅｎｄｉｎｇｔｈｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ． Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ＰＴＳＲ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅ ｒ Ｐ１１．
ＰＴＳＲ＝０ Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｔｏ ｒｅａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ．
ＰＴＳＲ＝１ Ａｍｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｔｏ ｒｅａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ．
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
，ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｏｔ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ．
＊
ｔｏｏｌ．
’
ｔ ｒｅａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ． Ｉｎ Ｍｅｔｈｏｄ
4.4.15 Manual Tool Regulate
Ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ， ｍａｎｙ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｔｏｏｌｓ ａｒｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｏｎｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ’ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃａｎ ｎｏｔ
ｃｏｉｎｃｉｄｅ ｄｕｅ ｔｏ ｉｎｓｔａｌｌ ｗａｒｐ ａｎｄ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ａｂｒａｓｉｏｎ． Ｔｏ ａｖｏｉｄ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ａｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ，
ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｕｓｅｒ ｅｄｉｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｕｓｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｄｒａｗｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ａｒｔ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ
ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｄｅｒｅｄ． Ｉｎ ｕｓｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｔｈ
ｔｏｏｌｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
Ｈｅｒｅ ａｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｗｏ ｍｅｔｈｏｄｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ：
Ｔｒｉａｌ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ：
（Ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｉｒｓｔ． Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｔｉｏｎ ｍｅｔｈｏｄ ｉｓ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ
ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ）
１． Ｉｎｓｔａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｔｒｉａｌ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｒｅｌｉａｂｌｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ａｎｄ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｎｙ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ
（ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｅａｒｌｉｅｒ ｕｓｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ）
２． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｅｍｌｙ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅｎ ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ， ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ， ｃｕｔ
ａ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄｅｒ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ．
GSK CNC Equipment Company 21
Page 22
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
３． Ｕｎｄｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ａｎｙ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓａｆｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ
ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ．
４． Ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄｅｒ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｉ ， ｔｈｅ
ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｅｔｒｉｃａｌ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｔｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｓ
， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｆｉｇｕｒｅｄ ｏｕｔ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｅｐｏｓｉｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ．
Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ＯＦＦＳＥＴ ｍｏｄｅ， ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｏｒ ｖｉｅｗｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｏｆ １￣８，ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
，ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｆｉｇｕｒｅｄ ｏｕｔ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｅｐｏｓｉｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＥＳＣ ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｇｕｒｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｄｅｐｏｓｉｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
５． Ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｇａｉｎ， ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｎ ｍａｎｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ， ｃｕｔ ａｎ ｅｎｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ．
６． Ｕｎｄｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｔ ｏｏｌ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ａｎｙ ｍｏｖｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓａｆｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ
ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ．
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａ ｄａｔｕｍ ｍａｒｋ （ａ ｆｉｘｕｒｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ ｃｈｕｃｋ ｅｎｄ， ｆｒｏｃｋ ｄａｔｕｍ ｐｌａｎｅ）， ｍｅａｓｕｒｅ
ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｄａｔｕｍ ｍａｒｋ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ ｅｎｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｋ，
ＯＦＦＳＥＴ Ｘ
Ｔ ＊ Ｘ
ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ，
Ｔ ＊ Ｘ
（＊
，ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ａ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ
ｔｈｅ
ＯＦＦＳＥＴ Ｚ
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ，ｔｈｅｎ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｅｔｒｉｃａｌ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｔ ＊ Ｚ （ ＊
ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）， ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ Ｚ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
，
ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｆｉｇｕｒｅｄ ｏｕｔ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｅｐｏｓｉｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ
ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ．
Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ＯＦＦＳＥＴ ｍｏｄｅ， ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｏｒ ｖｉｅｗｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｏｆ １ ８，ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
，ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｆｉｇｕｒｅｄ ｏｕｔ
Ｔ ＊ Ｚ
，ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ａ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｅｐｏｓｉｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｇｕｒｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｄｅｐｏｓｉｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
７． Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｔｏｏｌ， Ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｔｈｅ ａｂｏｖｅ ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈｅｓ ｔｏ ｓｅｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｉｓ ｔｏｏｌ．
８． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ａｎｙ ｃｈａｎｇｅ， Ａｌｌ ｔｏｏｌｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｅｄ ｓｕｃｈ ｔｈｉｓ．
Ｐｏｉｎｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ
1. Ｉｎｓｔａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｔｒｉａｌ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｒｅｌｉａｂｌｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ａｎｄ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｎｙ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ
（ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｅａｒｌｉｅｒ ｕｓｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ） ａｓ ａ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｔｏｏｌ．
2. Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｅｍｌｙ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｎｄ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ．
3. Select the seemly manual feed speed. In Manual Jog mode, move the tool to close to the selected point
on the workpiece. After confirm the tool point coincides with the selected point on the workpiece, stop
moving the tool.
4. Push the button Enter, the tool number and tool offset are displayed with highlight, push the
button twice continuously. The display of the tool number and tool offset is in normal again,
now the tool coordinate is deposited, and this tool coordinate goes into the benchmark to regulate the
other tools. (Except the reference tool, the other tool can’t be operated with this approach).
5. Push the button Enter, and the button to confirm, (if regulate the tool again for the damage of the
primary tool, please push the button ), the display of the tool number and the tool offset is in
输入
改写
normal, the tool number and the tool offset are figured out and deposited the current tool parameter
storage. Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ＯＦＦＳＥＴ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｏｒ ｖｉｅｗｅｄ．
22 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 23
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
6. In Manual Jog mode, Move out the toolpost to the position where the tool can be exchanged safely.
Exchange the regulating tool to the working position.
7. Ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｔｈｅ ａｂｏｖｅ ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈ ２， ３， ５ ｕｐ ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｄ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｗｉｔｈ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｏｒ， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｒｏｓｓ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｏｒ
ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ＯＦＦＳＥＴ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ａｎｄ ｖｉｅｗｅｄ． Ｃ ｏｎｓｕｌｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｉｏｎ
ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ＯＦＦＳＥＴ ｍｏｄｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｄａｍａｇｅｄ ｏｒ ｒｅｐｌａｃｅｄ， ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｎｙ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｔｏｏｌ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｔｏｏｌ． Ｆｉｓｒｔ， ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｅ
ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ ｐｏｉｎｔｇ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ａｎｄ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｔｈｅ ｏｏｆｓｅｔ ａｓ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
ｔｏｏｌ ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ ａｂｏｖｅ ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈ ４， ｂｕｔ ｒｅｆｕｓｅ ａｂｏｖｅ ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈ ５． Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓａｆｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ
ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｔｏｏｌ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅｎ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｂｏｖｅ ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈｅｓ ２， ３， ５ ｔｏ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｏｎ－ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ． （Ｔｈｅ
ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｉｍａｒｙ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓｎｏｔ ａｌｗａｙｓ ｚｅｒｏ）
Ｎｏｔｅ ４： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ａｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｌｉｎｅｕｐ ｔｏｏｌｓ ｉｎ ｕｓｅ， ｔｈｅ ｍｅｔｒｉｃａｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｉｎ ｔｒｉａｌ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ
ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｓｉｄｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ． Ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＋／ － ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｉｎｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ．
4.4.16 Manually return to the program reference point.
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ （ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ）， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ
ｔｈｉｓ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｔ ａｎｙ ｍｏｍｅｎｔ．
Ｘ
X axis returnning to program reference point Button : It is valid only on the JOG/AUTO mode.
Push this button to return from the current positon to the program reference point in x axis with the current quick
move speed.
Ｚ
Z axis returnning to program reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG/AUTO mode.
Push this button to return from the current positon to the program reference point in z axis with the current quick
move speed.
Note: After return to the program reference point in X axis and Z axis, all tool offset and system offset are cancelled,
and display T * 0 ( the * is the current tool number).
4.4.17 Manually return to the machine reference point (mechanic origin)
Ｆｉｘ ａ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ，
ｇｏ ｂａｃｋ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ （ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ｆｉｒｓｔ） ｔｏ ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ｅｒｒｏｒ
ｏｒ ｔｏ ａｖｏｉｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｃｉｄｅｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ： ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ， ｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ＭＺＲＯ ｂｉｔ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｏｎ ０．
X axis returnning to machine reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG mode. By
Ｘ
pushing this button, move the tool to the machine reference point in X axis with the current quick move speed.
Ｚ
Z axis returnning to machine reference point Button: It is valid only on the JOG mode. By
pushing this button, move the tool to the machine reference point in X axis with the current quick move speed.
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＭＺＲＭ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｉｓ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
１ Ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｍｏｖｅｓ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ａｘｉｓ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｂｌｏｃｋ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 23
Page 24
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X 0090. 000
Z 0125. 000
自动
ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｐｕｓｈｅｓ ｄｏｗｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｂｅｇｉｎ ｔｏ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｗｅｓｔ
ｓｐｅｅｄ （ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ Ｐ１７ ｏｒ Ｐ１８）， ａｎｄ ｋｅｅｐ ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｕｎｔｉｌ
ｔｈｅ ｂｌｏｃｋ ｄｉｓｅｎｇａｇｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ．
２ Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ （ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｚｅｒｏ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｘｉｍｉｔｙ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ），
ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ａｒｒｉｖｅ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｓｔｏｐｓ ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ．
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＭＺＲＭ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｉｓ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
１ Ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｍｏｖｅｓ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ａｘｉｓ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｂｌｏｃｋ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ
ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｐｕｓｈｅｓ ｄｏｗｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｂｅｇｉｎ ｔｏ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｗｅｓｔ
ｓｐｅｅｄ （ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ Ｐ１７ ｏｒ Ｐ１８）， ａｎｄ ｋｅｅｐ ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｔｏ ｒｅｓｅｔ
ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ．
２ Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｌｏｃｋ ｄｉｓｅｎｇａｇｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｒｅｔｕｒｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ， ｓｏ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ ｉ ｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｔｏ ａｖｏｉｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｃｉｄｅｎｔ， ｔｈｅ ＭＺＲＯ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｉｎ ０， ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｎ ｏｔ
ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ．
4.5 AUTO mode
Ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｒｕｎｓ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｕｓｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｔｅｐ ｂｙ ｓｔｅｐ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｎｔｅｒ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｒｙ ｒｕｎ， ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｒｕｎ， ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
ｒｕｎ ａｎｄ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｒｕｎ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ．
AUTO
AUTOCONTINUE %00
*N0000 G50 X100 Z100
N0010 M3 S2
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １５ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ
4.5.1 Fuction buttons in AUTO mode
单段
Single
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ａｎｄ ＡＵＴＯ ＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ
ｍｏｄｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｉｎ Ａｕｔｏ Ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｍｏｄｅ， ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｐａｕｓｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
24 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ＡＵＴＯ ＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ ｍｏｄｅ．
ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ
ｉｎ ｓｉｎｇｌｏ ｍｏｄｅ ｏｒ
ＡＵＴＯ ＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ
单段
Single
ｉｎ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ
Page 25
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Input
ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ． Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ＲＵＮ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ．
空运行
Ｄｒｙ
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ．
Ｉｎ ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ＬＥＤ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ ｌｉｇｈｔ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ａｒｅ ａｃｔｉｏｎｌｅｓｓ
ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ． Ｉｎ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ＬＥＤ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ
ｌｉｇｈｔｌｅｓｓ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ， ｔｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ
ｓｔａｒｔ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． Ｉｎ ｌｏｏｐ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ａｎ ａｃｔｉｏｎ
ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｃａｒｒｉｅｄ ｏｕｔ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ．
Ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｏｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｃｏｖｅｒ ｔｏ ｃｏｖｅｒ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｐｅｅｄ－ｄｏｗｎ ａｎｄ ｓｔｏｐ， ｔｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｓ
Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ
空运行
Ｄｒｙ
输入
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Input
输入
Input
Ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｆｅｅｄ ｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
空运行
Ｄｒｙ
ＰＡＵＳＥ！
ｗｉｔｈ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｎｅｘｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ
ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ．
4.5.2 Run the program automatically
Ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ Ａｕｔｏ ｍｏｄｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ａｌｌ ａｒｅ ｒｅａｄｙ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｏｒｄｅｒｌｙ ｔｏ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ
ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
4.5.2.1 Run from the first row of the program
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｗｏ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ ａｒｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎ ＊ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ
ｉｎ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ Ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．Ｔｈｅ
ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｒｏｗ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ．
4.5.2.2 Run from the appointed row in the program
Ｉｎ ｓｏｍｅ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎｓ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｌｌｏｗｓ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｆｒｏｍ ａｎｙ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ａｎｄ ｔｏ ｐａｒｋ ｔｈｅ
ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．
１． Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｒｏｗ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ．
ａ） Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｒｏｗ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
输入
ｂ） Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ ｔｏ ｐａｇｅ ｕｐ／ｄｏｗｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ． Ｐｕｓｈ ＥＳＣ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｒｍｅｒ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
２． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｏｐ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｐｒｏｍｐｔｓ
ＲＵＮ？
ｔｏ ｗａｉｔ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ．
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 25
Page 26
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
３． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｒｏｍｐｔｓ ＲＵＮ？ ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ Ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ａｓ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｇ００ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＥＳＣ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｒｍｅｒ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
４． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｇａｉｎ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
Note 1: The appoint segment can’t be in any fixed loop or compound loop, otherwise the result must be out of
expectation.
4.5.2.3 Single segment run and continue run
Ｖａｌｉｄａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｗｉｔｈ Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｒｕｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ Ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｏｎｃｅ．Ａｆｔｅｒ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｉｓ ｅｘａｃｔ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ Ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ
ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｂｏｖｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｕｐ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ａｎｙ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｕｎｓｕｉｔａｂｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｐｅｃｔａｎｔ ａｃｔｉｏｎ， ｓｔｏｐ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ．
Ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈｏｕｒｏｕｇｈｌｙ， ｔｈｅｎ ｃａｎ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｉｎ Ａｕｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｍｏｄｅ．
Switch between SINGLE mode and CONTINUE mode by pushing the button .
单段
Single
１． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｎｏｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈａｔ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ
ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ ｍｏｄｅ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
２． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ａ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈａｔ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｐａｕｓｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ
ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
单段
Single
ＡＵＴＯＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ
ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ＳＴＯＰ
ｉｎ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ．
ｗｉｔｈ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １６． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ Ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
单段
Single
ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ
ｉｎ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ
ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｏｎｌｙ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ
ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｃａｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ． Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓｔｏｐ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｒｅｐｅａｔｅｄ
单段
Single
ｉｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｏｎｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓｌｙ．
3. The button is invalid in running the program with SINGLE mode.
单段
Single
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｓｔａｔｅ ｉｓ ＡＵＴＯＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ ｍｏｄｅ．
4.5.2.4 Dry run and machining
Ｖａｌｉｄａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｗｉｔｈ ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ． Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ
ｃａｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｎ ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ， ｓｏ ｃａｎ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｇｒｅｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ
ｄｅｍａｎｄ， ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｌａｔｉｏｎｓ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ａｒｅ ｅｘａｃｔｌｙ ｔｏ ａｖｏｉｌｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｃｉｄｅｎｔ ｏｆ ｅｒｒｏｒ ｄａｔａ ｉｎｐｕｔ．
Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ Ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｕ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ． Ｔｈｅ ｌｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ
空运行
Ｄｒｙ
空运行
Ｄｒｙ
ｌｉｇｈｔｉｎｇ ｉｎ Ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ．
Ｎ ｏｔｅ １ ． Ｉｎ Ｄｒｙ ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｏｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２． Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｓｔａｔｅ ｉｓ Ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ ｗｈｅｎ ｅｎｔｅｒ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ．
’
ｔ ｍｏｖｅ， ｔｈｅ ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ．
26 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 27
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X 0090. 000
Z 0125. 000
X 0090. 000
Z 0125. 000
PICTURE 17 DISPLAY IN PROGRAM RUNNING
AUTOCONTINUE %00 SINGLE STOP
*N0000 G50 X100 Z100
N0010 M3 S2
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
PICTURE 16 SINGLE STOP
4.5.3 Display in program running
Ｉｎ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｔａｔｅｓ， ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ， ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｐｌａｎａｒ
ｓｋｅｌｅｔｏｎ ｍａｐ， ａｎｄ ｔｒａｉｌ ｏｆ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｏｎ． Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｖｅｒｙ ｃｏｎｖｅｎｉｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｍｏｎｉｔｏｒ ａｎｄ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ
ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ．
Display contents:
1. The dynamical coordinates, the dynamical planer outline or the trail of tool point
2. The contents of the current running segment
3. The states of spindle, coolant, rev, tool and other assistant functions
4. Feed and quickmove speed multiple
4.5.3.1 Coordinates display in program running
Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｍｏｄｅ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｗｈｅｎ ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ１７．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｉｎｔｏ ｔｒａｃｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ， ｏｎｌｙ ｃａｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ
ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｆｔｅｒ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ， ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ．
Ｔ
N0010 M3 S2
ｔｏ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ． Ｗｈｅｎ
AUTOCONTINUE %00
*N0000 G50 X100 Z100
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
4.5.3.2 Figure display in program running
When there has not the program that is running in AUTO mode, push the button
GSK CNC Equipment Company 27
Ｔ
to display the
Page 28
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
PARA OFFT DIAG
workblank outline with actual planar dimensions and the simulated tool shape as PICTURE 18.
Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｐｌａｎａｒ ｏｕｔｌｉｎｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
PICTURE 18 ACTUAL PLANAR OUTLINE DISPLAY IN AUTO MODE
N0000 G50 X100 Z100
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
Ｚ
ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｎｏｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈａｔ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ１９．
N0000 G50 X100 Z100
PICTURE 19 THE TRAIL DISPLAY OF THE TOOL POINT
AUTO CONTINUE %00
Z
X
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
AUTO CONTINUE %00
Z
X
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO
4.5.3.3 Define the data of the figure display
The screen area of this system is limited, so the figure display can be defined in this system with workblank
length and diameter, tool initial offset and display scale. Push the button Enter to set the workblank length and
diameter, tool initial offset and display scale in ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｐｌａｎａｒ ｏｕｔｌｉｎｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｏｆ
ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｉｎｔ as PICTURE 20.
28 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 29
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Z
PICTURE 20 DEFINE THE DATA OF THE FIGURE
Length: Total length of the workblank, unit : mm
Diameter: Max. Diameter of the workblank, unit : mm
Offset: The distance in Z axis from the program reference point to the machining start on the workblank (the
program reference point in X axis is the center of the workblank), unit: mm
N0000 G50 X100 Z100
长度
FEEDRATE 100% SPINDLE STOP
FASTRATE 100% SPDL REV 0000
COOLANT OFF TOOL 1 OFFSET 0
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
AUTO CONTINUE %00
Z
X
100
直径
80
偏移
0
比例
2:1
e.g. Workblank length: 100mm
Endface1
Endface 2
If the program reference point is at the endface 1, the offset is 0.
If the program reference point is at the endface 2, the offset is 100.
Display scale: It ensures the display size but it doesn’t change the actual machining dimensions. If the
dimension of the workblank isnot suitable for the screen size, the display scale can be adjusted to display the
workblank properly.
X
4.5.3.4 Input the data of figure display
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｎｏ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈａｔ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｏｒ ｔｈａｔ ｐａｕｓｅｓ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｄａｔａ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １８， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｐｏｉｎｔｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｌｅｎｇｔｈ．Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｄａｔａ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ａｎｄ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｏｆ ｄａｔａ． Ｒｅｃｙｃｌｅ
ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ４ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｏｆ ｄａｔａ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｅｎｔｅｒ．
Ａｄｊｕｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｓｃａｌｅ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｓｃａｌｅ．Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｓｃａｌｅ ｈａｓ ７ ｓｔｅｐｓ ａｓ ４：１ ３：１ ２：１ １：１ １：２ １：３ １：４． Ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｅｄ ｔｏ
ｒｅａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈｅ ｂｅｓｔ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ．
Ａｆｔｅｒ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｔｈｅ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｓｃａｌｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｎｅｗ ｄａｔａ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ａｕｔｏ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ，
ｏｒ
ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｉｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 29
Page 30
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｄａｔａ ｏｖｅｒｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｒｏｍｐｔｓ ＸＺ ｏｖｅｒｌｉｍｉｔ， ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｄａｔａ
ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｍｏｄｉｆｉｅｄ ａｇａｉｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｏｕｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｂｌａｎｋ ｏｕｔｌｉｎｅ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｓ
ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｅｘａｃｔｌｙ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｆｒｏｍ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｏ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｉｎ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｏｎｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒｔ ｏｆ ｎｅｘｔ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
ｔｒａｉｌ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒｔ ｏｆ ｆｏｒｍｅｒ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｔｒａｉｌ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ． Ｅｓｐｅｃｉａｌｌｙ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｐｌａｎａｒ ｏｕｔｌｉｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ， ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｏｕｔｌｉｎｅ ｃａｎ
ｎｅｗ ｌｏｏｐ．
’
ｔ ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｎｏｒｍａｌｌｙ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ａ
4.5.4 Operation of the assistant functions
In Auto mode, all the machine assistant functions such as spindle, coolant, speed and other controls can be
operated by pushing corresponding buttons manually without the program in running. The coolant can be
controlled in running.
Spindle positive rotation button The spindle rotates counter-clockwise (watch from the motor
shaft) and the Led on this button is lighted by pushing this button.
Spindle stop button The spindle stops running and the Led on the button or is
extinguished when push this button.
Spindle negative rotation button The spindle rotates clockwise (watch from the motor shaft)
and the Led on this button is lighted by pushing this button.
Coolant button Switch the coolant on/off. When start the coolant, display COOLANT ON on
the secreen and the Led on this button is lighted. When stop the coolant, display COOLANT OFF on the screen
and the Led on this button is extinguished.
Spindle shift button Select the spindle speed when the main spindle motor has more then one
step speed (not more then 16 steps) and the machine has the control loop.
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ ｆｕｃｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ
’
ｔ ｂｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｅｄ ｉｎ Ａｕｔｏ ｍｏｄｅ．
4.5.5 Adjustment of the speed mutiple
Ｉｎ Ａｕｔｏ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ
ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ｔｏ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ
Ａｃｔｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
ＦＥＥＤＲＡＴＥ
： ａｄｊｕｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ Ｆ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
＝
Ｆ ＊ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
．Ｉｔ ｈａｓ １６ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｆｒｏｍ ０％￣１５０％ （ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ １０％）． Ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ｒｅｓｔｒｉｃｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｆ ｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｔｏｐｓ．
Ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｕｐ ｔｏ １５０％
Ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｒｅｄｕｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｕｐ ｔｏ ０％．
Ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
Ｘ ａｘｉｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｚ ａｘｉｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
： ａｄｊｕｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｉｎ
＝
Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０５ ＊ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
＝
Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０６ ＊ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
Ｇ００
ａｎｄ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ．
30 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 31
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ ｆａｓｔｒａｔｅ． Ｉｔ ｈａｓ ４ ｓｔｅｐｓ ２５％， ５０％， ７５％， １００％． Ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｒｅｓｔｒｉｃｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ．
Ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｕｐ ｔｏ １００％
Ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｒｅｄｕｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｆａｓｔ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ｕｐ ｔｏ ２５％．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： ｗｈｅｔｈｅｒ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｉｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆａｓｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ． Ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ ｉｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ．
4.5.6 Some operations in running
Ｆｅｅｄ ｈｏｌｄ
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｓｐｅｅｄｓ ｄｏｗｎ ａｎｄ ｓｔｏｐ， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ＰＡＵＳＥ！
ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ．
Ｆｏｒ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ． Ｆｏｒ ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｆｅｅｄｈｏｌｄ， ｓｔｏｐ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ， ａｎｄ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｏ ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ．
退出
Esc
Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｐａｕｓｅｓ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ａｎｄ
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ＳＴＯＰ
ｆｒｏｍ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｏ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ａｎｄ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ．
单段
Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ
ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ． Ｆｏｒ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ．Ｆｏｒ ｅｓｃａｐｅ
退出
Esc
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯＣＯＮＴＩＮＵＥ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ＳＩＮＧＬＥ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｉｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ
ｔｈｅ ｆｉｘｅｄ ｌｏｏｐ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｏｎｃｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｉｓ ｌｏｏｐ．
Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔｏｐ
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｓｔａｒｔ ｏｒ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｏｎ， ｔｈｅ Ｌｅｄ ｏｎ
ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｓ ｌｉｇｈｔｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｏｆｆ， ｔｈｅ Ｌｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｂｕｔｔｏｎ is extinguished.
Ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ
Both feed speed multiple and fast move speed multiple can be amended in running, and it is invalid
immediately as soon as it is amended. The multiple adjustment is as chapter 4.5.5 Adjustment of the
speed multiple ．
If the feed speed multiple is 0 before running, the system prompts FEEDRATE 0%. When adjust the
feed speed multiple to 0% in running, the running stops without prompt. If adjust the feed speed multiple
isnot 0, the running carrys on.
4.5.7 Return to the program reference point in AUTO mode
For simplify the operation, the program can be started anywhere the tool stays after the workpiece coordinates
and the program reference point are defined. But the first dictate must be G00, and the X and Z axes cooedinates
must be defined with absolute coordinates. All resets by the reset button, and G26/G27/G29 dictates are returning
to the program reference point. After G26/G27/G29, the two axes absolute coordintes must be positioned with
G00 at the same time to ensure that the current workpiece keeps on being machined exactly. After reset by the
reset button, the system returns to the first segment of the program automatically. If push the run button ,
then the system runs from the first segment.
GSK CNC Equipment Company 31
Page 32
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
on the
different machine. Please refer to the operation manual of the
4.5.8 Feedhold knob in running automatically
There has an interface to the external feed/spindl hold knob, It can control the spindle rotation and slider
move.this knob is very convenient to debug a new program by controlling the spindle and the slider. This knob has
three positions corresponding to three kinds controls as follows:
Position 1: Permit the spindle rotation and the slider move.
Position 2: Permit the spindle rotation, prohibit the slider move.
Position 3: Prohibit the spindle rotation and the slider move.
Note: The identifier of the feedhold knob may be different
machine.
Feedhold knob
4.5.8.1 Application of the feedhold knob
In front of running program:
The spindle can start or stop with the spindle control buttons when the knob at position 1 or position2. but the
spindle can’t start or stop with the spindle control buttons when the knob at position 3.
In Auto single mode
When the knob at position 1, all dictates run as normal. When the knob at position 2, spindle dictates run as
normal but the X,Z axis move dictates don’t run. When the knob at position 3, any dictate can’t run.
In Auto continue mode
After start the program, the knob can be adjustable at any moment to control the spindle and the move.
When the knob at position 1, the program runs as normal.
When the knob from position 1 to position 2, the slider move pauses, but the spindle keeps the previous
condition.
When the knob from position 2 to position 3, the spindle stops.
When the knob from position 3 to positon 2, the spindle resumes the previous condition.
When the knob from position 2 to position 1, the slider mover resumes the previous condition.
When the feed holds and spindle stops, push the button ESC or reset button, this system escapes from auto
running. The non-execution dictates and the spindle can’t be held. If keep on machining, only start the program
again.
4.6 Parameter setup
There have 23 group parameters numbered from P01 to P23 in this system. Each parameter is defined to
confirm a certain function of this system and the machine, so the parameters must be defined again when
installation and adjustment of the machine and the CNC system.
Push the button PAR to enter the parameter setuo mode. The first screen is from P01 to P09 as follows:
32 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 33
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
P01 8000.000
P02 -8000.000
P03 8000.000
P04 -8000.000
P05 06000
P06 06000
P07 00.000
P08 00.000
P09 0000
Z AXIS OBVERSE LIMIT
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
PARAMETER
PICTURE 21 PARAMETER SETUP
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｐａｇｅ ｕｐ／ｄｏｗｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ （９
ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ）． Ａｎｄ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｏｎｅ ａｎｄ ｉｔｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎ．
4.6.1 Parameter instruction
When the parameter number is choiced, the parameter is displayed as highlight, and its definition is displayed
under it.
4.6.1.1 Parameter P01, P02--Z axis positive,negative overtravel limit
Parameters P01, P02 define the Max. travels in Z axie positive, negative directions separately. If the Z axis
coordinate isnot less then that defined by the parameter P01 (positive limit), the slider can’t move along positive
direction, but it can move along negative direction. If the Z axis coordinate isnot bigger then that defined by the
parameter P02 (negative limit), the slider can’t move along the negative direction, but it can move along the
positive direction. Unit: mm
4.6.1.2 Parameter P03, P04—X axis positive, negative overtravel limit
Parameters P03, P04 define the Max. travels in X axis positive, negative directions separately. If the X axis
coordinate isnot less then that defined by the parameter P03 (positive limit), the slider can’t move along positive
direction, but it can move along negative direction. If the X axis coordinate isnot bigger then that defined by the
parameter P04 (negative limit), the slider can’t move along the negative direction, but it can move along the
positive direction. Unit: mm
ｏｒ
ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｒ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｏｕｇｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｓｃａｌｅ ｉｓ １６０００ （ ８０００） ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｂｉｇｇｅｒ ｔｈｅｎ ８０００．
4.6.1.3 Parameter P05—Z axis fast move speed
Parameter P05 defines the Z axis fast move speed in manual move and in G00. The actual fast move speed in
Z axis is restricted by the fast move speed multiple, too. Z axis actual fast move speed=P05* fast move speed
multiple. Unit: mm/min
GSK CNC Equipment Company 33
Page 34
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
4.6.1.4 Parameter P06—X axis fast move speed
Parameter P06 defines the X axis fast move speed in manual move and in G00. The actual fast move speed in
X axis is restricted by the fast move speed multiple, too. X axis actual fast move speed=P06* fast move speed
multiple. Unit: mm/min
4.6.1.5 Parameters P07 P08—Compensations of the reverse clearances in Z, X axie
Parameters P07, P08 define the compensations the mechanical reverse clearance in Z, X axis separately. Unit:
mm
There have clearances in the thread, the reducer, and the other transmissions of the machine, so the errors
must happen in the reciprocating movement. After set the parameters P07, P08, this system can compensate the
errors when the movement changes the direction.
Measurement of the mechanical reverse clearances: (Example for Z axis):
1. Select the JOG mode and the proper feed speed.
2. Assembly the dial indicator on the proper position on the machine, Move the tool to touch the probe of the
dial indicator and adjust the finger of the dial indicator at zero.
3. Select the JOG Single feed mode with the step 1.0mm.
4. Push the button or to move the toolpost to the dial indicator, let the finger of the dial indicator
run one circuit and point to the zero again.
5. Push the button or to move the toolpost away from the dial indicator for the same distance,
let the finger of the dial indicator run back, but it can’t return to the 0 for the clearance. Then the distance from
reading to the zero is the Z axis reverse clearance.
Note 1: Repeat above approaches some times to obtain the exact value.
Note 2: Measurement of the X axis reverse clearance is same as above approaches. But the observed result must time 2
to change into the diameter value.
Note 3: Compensate the reverse clearances in X, Z axis with the start speed (defined by P17, P18) .
4.6.1.6 Parameter P09 – Low spindle speed
Parameter P09 deifnes the spindle convertor control with low gear speed, and then the syetem output 10V
DC signal corresponding to the Max. speed. The parameter P09 is invalid when control the spindle speed with S
progression. Unit: rev/min.
4.6.1.7 Parameter P10 High spindle speed
Parameter P10 deifnes the spindle convertor control with high gear speed, and then the syetem output 10V
DC signal corresponding to the Max. speed. The parameter P10 is invalid when control the spindle speed with S
progression. Unit: rev/min.
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅｎ’ｔ ｔｈｅ ｈｉｇｈ／ｌｏｗ ｐａｒｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ， ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
Ｐ１０． ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０９ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ．
4.6.1.8 Parameters P11, P12—bit parameter 1, bit parameter 2
For the different requirements of the different machine, some control functions of this system can realize the
different functions by defining the corresponding bit in the parameters P11 , P12 with 0 or 1.
The 8 bits named as D7~D0 from left to right. Each bit can be set as 0or 1.
34 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 35
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｂｉｔｓ ｏｆ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｎｓｔｒｕｃｔｉｏｎｓ
Ｄ７
WHLA PTRS TCON SCOD CHCD LINE DIRZ DIRX
ＤＩＲＸ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ＤＩＲＺ
Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ＣＨＣＤ ＣＨＣＤ＝０
ＣＨＣＤ＝１
ＬＩＮＥ ＬＩＮＥ＝０
ＬＩＮＥ＝１
ＳＣＯＤ ＳＣＯＤ＝０
ＳＣＯＤ＝１
ＴＣＯＮ ＴＣＯＮ＝０
ＴＣＯＮ＝１
ＰＴＳＲ ＰＴＳＲ＝０
ＰＴＳＲ＝１
ＷＨＬＡ ＷＨＬＡ＝０
ＷＨＬＡ＝１
Ｄ６
Ｄ５
Ｄ４
Ｄ３
Ｄ２
Ｄ１
Ｄ０
Ｄｏｎ’ｔ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｉｎ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｅ ｍｏｄｅ ｏｒ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ ｒｅｖ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ．
Check the encoder lines in diagnose mode or JOG mode, but the actual spindle rev is
displayed.
Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ：１２００ｐｕｌｓｅ／ｒｅｖ
Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ：１０２４ｐｕｌｓｅ／ｒｅｖ
Ｓ１ Ｓ４， ４ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｄｉｒｅｃｔ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｓ０ Ｓ１５， １６ ｓｔｅｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃ ｔｕｒｒｅｔ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ
ｌｉｎｅｕｐ ｔｏｏｌ
Ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
Ａｍｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
Ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ０．１ｍｍ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ
Ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ０．１ｍｍ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｈａｎｄｗｈｅｅｌ
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ＳＣＯＤ ｏｆ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｌｉｓｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｓ ｃｏｄｅｓ：
ｃｏｄｅ
ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｓ１
Ｓ００ Ｓ０１ Ｓ０２ Ｓ０３ Ｓ０４ Ｓ０５ Ｓ０６ Ｓ０７ Ｓ０８ Ｓ０９ Ｓ１０ Ｓ１１ Ｓ１２ Ｓ１３ Ｓ１４ Ｓ１５
Ｓ２
Ｓ３
Ｓ４
Ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔｓ ｗｉｔｈ ａｒｅ ｖａｌｉｄ ｉｎ ａｂｏｖｅ ｔａｂｌｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｂｙ ｓｅｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ＤＩＲＸ ａｎｄ ＤＩＲＺ ａｓ ０ ｏｒ １， ｔｈｅ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｔｏｒｓ
ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ａｎｙ ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ． Ｓｏ ｌｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｍｏｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｐｏｗｅｒ ｏｎ ａｇａｉｎ ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｍａｋｅ ｔｈｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ ｖａｌｉｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｄ７，Ｄ６ ａｒｅ ｓｔａｎｄｂｙ ．
’
ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ
Ｂｉｔｓ ｏｆ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｎｓｔｒｕｃｔｉｏｎｓ Ｐ１２
Ｄ０７
Ｄ０６
Ｄ０５
Ｄ０４ Ｄ０３ Ｄ０２
Ｄ０１
Ｄ０
MZRO DLMZ DLMX MZRM MSP MODM MODT MDSP
MDSP 0 Spindle rev progression control
1 Spindle rev analog control (0~10VDC) (frequency conversion spindle)
MODT 0 Push the tool change button to change the tool directly
1 Push the button Enter to change the tool after push the tool change button .
GSK CNC Equipment Company 35
Page 36
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
MODM 0 Start/stop of the spindle and the coolant are controlled with power level (only M03/04/05,
M08/09 are controlled)
1 Start/stop of the spindle and the coolant are controlled with pulse (the other M signals are
power level )
MSP 0 Stop the spindle without brake signal output
1 Stop the spindle with brake signal output (the brake time is defined by the parameter P16)
MZRM 0 Return to the mechanical point with checking one rotation signal
1 Return ot the mechanincal point without checking one rotation signal
DAMX 0 Display X AXIS DRIVER ALARM when the driver alarm input signal in X axis is high
level.
1 Display X AXIS DRIVER ALARM when the driver alarm input signal in X axis is low
level.
DAMZ 0 Display Z AXIS DRIVER ALARM when the driver alarm input signal in X axis is high
level.
1 Display Z AXIS DRIVER ALARM when the driver alarm input signal in X axis is low
level.
MZRO 0 The function to return to the mechanical point is invalid.
1 The function to return to the mechanical point is valid.
4.6.1.9 Parameter P13—the most tool positions
Parameter P13 sets the most tool positions on the machine. This system defaults 4 positions. When it can
expand 6~8 positions with coding the position signals.
4.6.1.10 Parameter P14—Toolpost reverse time
Parameter P14 sets the retentive signal time of reverse to lock the toolpost. Unit: 0.1 second
Note 1: The value of the parameter P14 must be adjusted to fit for the assemblied toolpost. If the value of the parameter
P14 is too big, the motor of the toolpost may be damaged. If the value of the parameter P14 is too small, the toolpost
can’t be locked.
4.6.1.11 Parameter P15— The pulse time of the M code
Parameter P15 sets the pulse time when the spindle and coolant control with pulse mode. U nit: 0.1second.
4.6.1.12 Parameter P16—The signal time of the spindle brake
Parameter P16 sets the signal time of the spindle brake. Unit: 0.1second.
4.6.1.13 Parameter P17—The lowest start speed in Z axis
Parameter P17 sets the lowest start speed in Z axis with G00 dictate or in JOG mode. Unit: mm/min
When the actual Z axie speed is lower then the value of the parameter P17, there has not the speed up/down
process in Z axis. The value of the parameter P17 must be adjusted to fit for the machine.
4.6.1.14 Parameter P18—The lowest start speed in X axis
Parameter P18 sets the lowest start speed in X axis with G00 dictate or in JOG mode. U nit: mm/min
When the actual X axie speed is lower then the value of the parameter P18, there has not the speed up/down
process in X axis. The value of the parameter P18 must be adjusted to fit for the machine.
4.6.1.15 Parameter P19—The speed up/down time in Z axis
Parameter P19 sets the speed up/down time in Z axis from the lowest start speed (P17) to the higest speed (P5)
linearly with G00 dictate or in Jog mode. Unit: millisecond.
The speed up/down time in Z axis increase with the value of the parameter P19. So the value of the parameter
36 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 37
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
should be shorter as soon as possible based on satisfying the load characteristic.
4.6.1.16 Parameter P20—The speed up/down time in X axis
Parameter P20 sets the speed up/down time in X axis from the lowest start speed (P18) to the higest speed
(P6) linearly with G00 dictate or in Jog mode. Unit: millisecond.
The speed up/down time in X axis increase with the value of the parameter P20. So the value of the
parameter should be shorter as soon as possible based on satisfying the load characteristic.
4.6.1.17 Parameter P21—The feed start speed
Parameter P21 sets the start speed of the G01, G02, G03 and other feed dictates in Auto mode. Unit: mm/min.
There has not the speed up/down procees when the speed defined with F is lower then the value of the parameter
P21.
4.6.1.18 Parameter P22—the feed speed up/down time
Parameter P22 sets the time to increase/reduce the speed of G01, G02, G03 and other feed dictates in Auto
mode from the speed appointed by the parameter P21 to 6000mm/min. Unit: millisecond
By adjusting the parameters P5, P6, P17~P22, this system can fit for the different motors or the machines with different
loads to increase the machining efficiency.
4.6.1.19 Parameter P23 The space between two sequence numbers of the program
Parameter P23 sets the increment of the sequence number in Edit mode, the space between teo sequence
numbers.
Parameters list in this GSK928TC system:
Parameters
number
P01 Z axis positive limit mm 8000.000 0~8000.000
P02 Z axis negative limit mm -8000.000 -8000.000~0
P03 X axis positive limit mm 8000.000 0~8000.000
P04 X axis negative limit mm -8000.000 -8000.000~0
P05 Z axis max. speed mm 6000 0~15000
P06 X axis max. speed mm 6000 0~15000
P07 Z axis reverse clearance mm 00.000 0~65.535
P08 X axis reverse clearance mm 00.000 0~65.535
P09 Spindle low rev rpm 1500 0~6000
P10 Spindle hig rev rpm 3000 0~6000
P11 Bit parameter 1 00000000 0~11111111
P12 Bit parameter 2 00000000 0~11111111
P13 Tool positions 4 1~8
P14 Toolpost reverse time 0.1second 10 0.1~99.9
P15 M code time 0.1second 10 0.1~99.9
P16 Spindle brake time 0.1second 10 0.1~99.9
P17 Z axis lowest start speed mm/min 50 8~1000
P18 X axis lowest start speed mm/min 50 8~1000
P19 Z axis speedup time millisecond 600 8~9999
P20 X axisspeedup time millisecond 600 8~9999
Definition Unit Initial value Scale
GSK CNC Equipment Company 37
Page 38
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
P21 Feed start speed mm/min 50 8~6000
P22 Feed speed up/down time millisecond 600 8~9999
P23 The space between two
sequence numbers
10 1~255
4.6.2 Parameters input
All the parameters of this system are initialled before it leaves factory. When it is assemblied on the machine,
it is necessary to adjust the parameters according to the actual conditions.
Approaches of parameter input:
1. Enter the Parameter mode.
2. Move the cursor to the parameter to be amended with highlight by pushing the button or
(display the corresponding definition of the parameter at the bottom of the sreen), then push the
button
输入
Input
to display a highlight square that can be amended.
3. Input the parameter value by keyboard. Push the button to delete the wrong input.
4. Push the button Enter to confirm.
ｅ．ｇ． Ａｄｊｕｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０５ ｔｏ ４５００ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２２
P01 8000.000
P02 -8000.000
P03 8000.000
P04 -8000.000
P05 06000
P06 06000
P07 00.000
P08 00.000
P09 0000
Z AXIS FAST MOVE SPEED 4500 Enter
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
PARAMETER
PICTURE 22 INPUT THE PARAMETER VALUE
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ｐ０５ ｗｉｔｈ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ａ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ ｓｑｕａｒｅ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｔｉｏｎ ｔｏ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ．
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
４
，
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｗｒｏｎｇ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｖａｌｕｅ ｉｓ ｏｖｅｒ ｔ ｈｅ ｌｉｍｉｔｅｄ ｓｃａｌｅ， ｔｈｅ ｉｕｐｕｔ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｃａｎ
ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ａｆｔｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｖａｌｕｅ， ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｔｏ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＥＳＣ．
输入
Input
５ ， ０ ， ０
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ａｍｅｎｄｍｅｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０５．
ｂｙ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ．
’
ｔ ｂｅ
38 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 39
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
刀补
4.6.3 Parameter initialization
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｏｗｅｒｓ ｏｎ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｔｉｍｅ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ ａｒｅ ｄｉｓｏｒｄｅｒｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ
ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅｄ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔｔｅｄ．
Ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈｅｓ ｔｏ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ：
１． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎｓ ａｎｄ ．
２． Ｒｅｌｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｆｉｒｓｔ．
删除
Del
３． Ｔｈｅｎ ｒｅｌｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚａｔｉｏｎ．
4.6.4 Searches and amendment of the bit parameter definition
删除
Del
Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｆｉｎｉｔｏｎｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ ａｒｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ｕｎｄｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ．ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ．
１． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ．
２． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｈｉｇｈｅｓｔ ｂｉｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｈｉｇｈｌｉｇｈｔ， ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎ ｕｎｄｅｒ ｉｔ．
３． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｌｅｆｔ ｏｒ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｔｏ ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎ ａｒｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｕｎｄｅｒ ｉｔ．
４． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ０ ｏｒ １ ｔｏ ｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｖａｌｕｅ ａｓ ０ ｏｒ １ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ．
５． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ＥＳＣ
ｔｏ ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｅａｒｃｈｅｓ，
ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｒｍｅｒ ｂｉｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ． Ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ｅｓｃａｐｅ
ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅａｒｃｈｅｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｐｏｉｎｔｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｂｉｔ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｂｉｔ
ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ．
4.7 Compensation of the tool offset
ｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ９ ｇｒｏｕｐｓ ｔｏｏ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｆｒｏｍ Ｔ１ ｔｏ Ｔ９． Ｅａｃｈ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｄａｔａ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ． Ｔｈｅ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｂｙ
ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ． Ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎｐｕｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｎｔｅｒ
OFT
ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｍｏｄｅ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２３．
T1Z 0000.000
T 1X 0000.000
T 2Z 0000.000
T 2X 0000.000
T 3Z 0000.000
T 3X 0000.000
T 4Z 0000.000
T 4X 0000.000
T5Z 0000.000
No. 1 Tool offset Z
TOOL OFFSET
PICTURE 23 TOOL OFFSET
GSK CNC Equipment Company 39
Page 40
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
诊断
刀补
刀补
4.7.1 Tool offset searches
In tool offset mode, the contents of every offset can be viewed. Push the button or to search the
front offset or the next offset. Push the button or to search theoffset on the front page or the next
page. 9 rows can be displayed in screen.
4.7.2 Input the tool offset by keyboard
Input the tool offset by keyboard: absolute input and relative input
Absolute input the tool offset:
1. Push the button to enter the tool offset mode.
OFT
2. Push the button or to move the cursor to the offset to be amended (the tool offset number is
displayed under it when move the cursor)
3. Push the button to display a highlight square after the tool offset number.
输入
Input
4. Input the tool offset value by keyboard. The wrong input can be deleted by pushing the button and
input the new value again.
5. Push the button
Ｅ ｎｔｅｒ
to confirm, and store the tool offsets in the parameter storage.
Ｒ ｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
1. Push the button to enter the tool offset mode.
OFT
2. Push the button or to move the cursor to the offset to be amended (the tool offset number is
displayed under it when move the cursor)
3. Push the button to display a highlight square after the tool offset number.
输入
Input
4. Input the offset value by keyboard. The wrong input can be deleted by pushing the button and input
the new value again. Push the button to cumulate the input value and the former value. If the input value is
改写
positive, add the input value to the former value, and store the result automatically. If the input value is negative,
reduce the input value from the former value and store the result automatically.
4.8 Diagnosis
Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｈａｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｌｆ－ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ ｉｎｐｕｔ／ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｏｎ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｍｏｄｅ
DGN
ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２４．
40 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 41
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
M03 M04 M05 M08 M09 MSP
DIAGNOSIS
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ ０ （ｄｏｎ’ｔ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ）， ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｏｔ
ｂｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈａｒｅ ｈａｓ ｎｏｔ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｏｒ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ＥＮＣＯＤＥＲ ＥＲＲ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｓｃａｐｅ
1 DEZ DEX SHL TPS T4 T3 T2 T1
OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 ALZ ALX UI2 UI1 -LT TL PCZ PCX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 TZL TFL-
INPUT 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
2 M10 S04 M32 S03 U02 S02 U01 S01
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
SPINDLE 0350 ENCODER 1200
EDIT MANU AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２４ ＤＩＡＧＮＯＳＩ Ｓ
4.8.1 Input interface diagnosis instruction
Ｉｎｐｕｔ １
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ２
Ｄ
EZ
ＬＺ
Ｄ Ｅ Ｘ
ＳＨＬ
Ｔ ＰＳ
Ｔ ｏｏｌ ａｒｒｉｖｅｄ
Ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｈｉｇｈｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｓｐｅｅｄｄｏｗｎ ｚｅｒｏ
ａｘｉｓ ｓｐｅｅｄｄｏｗｎ ｚｅｒｏ
Ｌ
ＵＩ２
ＵＩ１
－ ＬＴ
Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ
Ｔ４
Ｔ３
Ｎｏ． ４ Ｔｏｏｌ
Ｔ２
Ｎｏ． ３ Ｔｏｏｌ
Ｎｏ． ２ Ｔｏｏｌ
ＬＴ
Ｘ Ｚ ａｘｅｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｌｉｍｉｔ
ＰＣＺ
ＰＣＸ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ
Ｚａｘｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ
Ｘ Ｚ ａｘｅｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｌｉｍｉｔ
Ｔ１
Ｎｏ． １ Ｔｏｏｌ
ａｘｉｓ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ａｌａｒｍ
ａｘｉｓ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ａｌａｒｍ
Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 41
Page 42
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｓ０４
Ｓ０３
Ｓ０２
Ｕ０１
０１
Ｎｏ． １ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｌｏｗ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｐｕｓｈ ａｎｙ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｓｃａｐｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｔｈｉｓ ＧＳＫ９２８ＴＣ ｃａｎ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ４ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｓ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓ ｔ ｉｎ ｎｏｒｍａｌ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｉｓ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ， ｉｔ
ｃａｎ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ６ ｏｒ ８ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｓ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ． Ｔｈｅ
３ ４
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｉｓ ０． Ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ ｄｉｓｇｎｏｓｉｓ， ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｖａｌｉｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ １．
T5 T8
ｃｏｄｅ：
4.8.2 Input/output interface diagnosis display
Ｔｈｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｐｕｔ／ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｂｉｔ （Ｄ７￣Ｄ０ ｆｒｏｍ ｌｅｆｔ ｔｏ ｒｉｇｈｔ）
Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ １
Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ２
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒ ｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｔａｔｅ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｅｓｃａｐｅ．
ＴＺＬ ＴＦＬ
７ ６ ５ ４ ３ ２ １ ０
Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｂｒａｋｅ
Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔｏｐ
Ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ
Ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ
Ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ
Ｔ ｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ
Ｔ ｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ
positive rotation
positive rotation
Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔａｒｔ
Second step spindle speed
No. 2 user output
Ｔ ｈｉｒｄ ｓｔｅｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔｏｐ
Ｗ ｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｌｏｃｋ／ｕｎｌｏｃｋ
ｖａｌｉｄ．Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ．
ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ａｓ
０．
Fourth step spindle speed
4.8.3 Encoder Spindle encoder and spindle rev test
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｗｉｌｌ ｔｅｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｗｈｅｎ ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｍｏｄｅ．
Ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２４， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ． Ｕｎｉｔ： ｒｐｍ． Ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｌｉｎｅｓ ａｒｅ ｔｈｅ
ｐｕｌｓｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ．
１．Ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｓ ｗｈｅｔｈｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ
ｌｉｎｅｓ．
２．Ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｄｉａｇｎｏｓｉｓ ｃａｎ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｓ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｖａｌｕｅ ｏｎｌｙ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｉｓ
42 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 43
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ａｎｄ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｉｓ ｏｎ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｒｏｍｐｔｓ
３．Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｓｙｎｃ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｓ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅｓ ｏｎｅ
ｃｉｒｃｌｅ， ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｍｕｓｔ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｏｎｅ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｅｓｔｅｄ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｆａｌｌｓ ｓｈｏｒｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆａｃｔ．
Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｔｅｓｔｅｄ ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ ｔｏ ｔｅｓｔ
ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｌｉｎｅｓ． Ｍｏｒｅｏｖｅｒ， ｔｈｅ ｔｅｓｔｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｋｅｅｐｉｎｇ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｐｕｓｈ ａｎｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ
ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｅｓｔｉｎｇ．
ＥＮＯＣＤＥＲ ＥＲＲ．
空运行
Ｄｒｙ
4.8.4 Machine assistant functions control
In diagnosis mode, the system can run the assistant functions by pushing the corresponding button directly,
but it cannot run the assistant functions by inputing the dictate.
Push the button , the spindle rotates ahead, Led on the button lights, the corresponding bit of M3 in
output 1 is 1, and the corresponding bit of M5 in output 1 is 0.
Push the button , the spindle stops, Led on the buttons blacks out, the corresponding bits of M3/M4
in output 1 are 0, and the corresponding bit of M5 in output 1 is 1.
Push the button , the spindle reverses, Led on the button lights, the corresponding bit of M4 in output 1
is 1, and the corresponding bit of M5 in output 1 is 0.
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｏｎ／ｏｆｆ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔａｒｔｓ， Ｌｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｌｉｇｈｔｓ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｍ８ ｉｎ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ １ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｍ９ ｉｎ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
１ ｉｓ ０． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔａｒｔｓ， Ｌｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｂｌａｃｋｓ ｏｕｔ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｍ８
ｉｎ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ １ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｍ９ ｉｎ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ １ ｉｓ １．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ｓ１ ｔｏ Ｓ４ ｏｒ ｆｒｏｍ Ｓ０ ｔｏ Ｓ１６ （ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ
ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１）． Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｉｔｓ ｏｆ Ｓ０１ ￣Ｓ０４ ｉｎ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ２ ａｒｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ
ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｖａｌｕｅ．
Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ ｃｈａｎｇｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｎｃｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｂｉｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
Ｔ４ Ｔ１ ｉｎ ｉｎｐｕｔ １ ａｒｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｖａｌｕｅ．
4.9 Emergency stop, overtravel limit and other alarms
Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ａｎ ｉｎｔｅｇｒａｔｅｄ ｓａｆｅｇｕａｒｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ＧＳＫ９２８ＴＣ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｔｏ ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ．
4.9.1 Emergency stop
Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ａｎ ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ ｉｎ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｎｏｒｍａｌ ｃｌｏｓｅ ｃｏｎｔａｃｔ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｄ ｍｕｓｈｒｏｏｍ ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｉｎ ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｔｏ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ， ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｎｄ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２５．
EMERGENCY
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２５ ＥＭＥＲＧＥＮＣＹ ＡＬＡＲＭ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 43
Page 44
Operation GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Del
Ｔｕｒｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ａｒｒｏｗ， ｉｔ ｒｅｌｅａｓｅｓ， ｔｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ａｎｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｐａｎｅｌ
ｏｆ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｏｒｍａｌ ｓｔａｔｅ．
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓｎｏｔ ｔｈｅ Ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ｔｈｅ ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ
ｉｎ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ＧＮＤ ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ
ｎｏｒｍａｌ．
’
ｔ ｒｕｎ ｉｎ
4.9.2 Overtravel limit alarm
Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｔｈｅ ｏｖｅｒｔｒａｖｅｌ ｌｉｍｉｔ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｓ
ｓｉｇｎａｌｓ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｌｏｃｋ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｐｒｅｓｓｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｏ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｔｏｐｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ．
Ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ’ｔ ｓｔｏｐ． Ｔｈｅ ｏｒｖｅｒｔｒａｖｅｌ ａｌａｒｍ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｐ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｃｏｒｎｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｒｅｅｎ．
Ｔｏ ｃｅｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｏｖｅｒｔｒａｖｅｌ ｌｉｍｉｔ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｒｅｖｅｒｓｅｌｙ ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ．
Ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｉｓ ｒｅｎｅｗｅｄ．
4.9.3 Driver alarm
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ａｌａｒｍ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｓｅｎｄｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｓｔｏｐｓ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｔｏｐ， ａｎｄ
ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｓ
ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌｓ． Ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｇａｉｎ， ｐｌｅａｓｅ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌ ｆａｉｌｕｒｅｓ ａｒｅ ｒｅｍｏｖｅｄ．
Ｘ ＡＸＩＳ ＤＲＩＶＥＲ ＡＬＡＲＭ
4.9.4 Other alarm
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ａｌａｒｍ ｈａｐｐｅｎｓ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｒｏｍｐｔｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｗｏｒｄｓ， ｐｌｅａｓｅ
ｒｅｍｏｖｅｔｈｅｆａｉｌｕｒｓ ｒｅｆｅｒｒｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｅｎｄｉｘ
ｏｒ
Ｚ ＡＸＩＳ ＤＲＩＶＥＲ ＡＬＡＲＭ
． Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｔｏｐｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ａｎｄ ｃｌｏｓｅｓ ａｌｌ
Ａｌａｒｍ Ｌｉｓｔ
．
4.10 LCD brightness adjustment
Ｔｈｅ ＬＣＤ ｂｒｉｇｈｔｎｅｓｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｅｄ ａｃｏｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｃａｌｅ ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎｓ． Ｉｎ ＪＯＧ
ｍｏｄｅ， ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｏｒ ＤＩＡＧ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｒ ｔｏ ａｄｊｕｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｂｒｉｇｈｔｎｅｓｓ ａｎｄ ｋｅｅｐ
ｔｈｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ． Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ ｋｅｅｐ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｒｍｅｒ ｂｒｉｇｈｔｎｅｓｓ ａｆｔｅｒ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｏｆｆ． （Ｔｈｅ
ｂｒｉｇｈｔｎｅｓｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ）
4.11 Driver switch control
Ｉｎ ｎｏｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｔａｔｅ， ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｔｏ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｗｉｃｅ， ｔｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ｃｌｏｓｅｄ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｍｏｔｏｒ ｉｓ ａｔ ｌｉｂｅｒｔｙ．Ｉｎ Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ｉｓ ｂｅｉｎｇ ｃｌｏｓｅｄ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ
ｄｒｉｖｅｒａｇａｉｎ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｔｏｒ．（ ｔｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｉｎ ｅｄｉｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ）．
删除
Del
删除
44 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 45
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X
PROGRAMMING
I. Introduction
Ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｉｓ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｕｓｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈａｔ ｗａｓ ｅｄｉｔｅｄ ｉｎ ａｄｖａｎｃｅ． Ｔｈｅ
ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｉｓ ｅｄｉｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｕｓｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｂａｓｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｄｒａｗｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ａｒｔ ｗｉｔｈ
ｔｈｅ ＣＮＣ ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ．
Ｈｅｒｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｃｅｐｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ａｎｄ ｄａｔａ ｏｆ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｅｄｉｔ ｒｅｇｉｍｅ． Ｐｌｅａｓｅ
ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｌｙ ｕｎｄｅｒｓｔａｎｄ ｔｈｅｓｅ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
１ ．１ Ｃ ｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ ａｘｉｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｃｃｏｒｄｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ＩＳＯ ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ． Ｔｈｅ ｔｗｏ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｘｅｓ ａｒｅ ｎａｍｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ａｎ
Ｘ Ｚ
ｐｌａｎｅ ｉｓ ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｔｅｒｓｅｃｔａｎｔ ａｎｄ ｖｅｒｔｉｃａｌ ａｘｅｓ．
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ： ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｐｅｒｐｅｎｄｉｃｕｌａｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｌｉｎｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ
Ｚ ａｘｉｓ： ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｌｉｎｅ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Spindle
PICTURE 1. X Z rectangular coordinates
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｌｅａｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｃｅｎｔｅｒ．
ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｌｅａｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｈｅａｄｓｔｏｃｋ．
Z
１ ．２ Ｍｅｃｈａｎｉｃ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ
Ｔｈｅ ｍｅｃｈａｎｉｃ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｉｓ ａ ｓｅｔｔｌｅｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ． Ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｍｅｃｈａｎｉｃ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ
ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｓｔ ｔｒａｖｅｌ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ａｎｄ ｂｌｏｃｋ
ａｒｅ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ａｔ ｈｅｒｅ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｔ ｄｅｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ａｎｄ ｂｌｏｃｋ ａｒｅｎ’ｔ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ， Ｐｌｅａｓｅ ｄｏｎ ’ｔ
ｕｓｅ ｔｈｉｓ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ， ｏｒ ｌｏｃｋ ｔｈｉｓ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｂｙ ｓｅｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ＭＺＲＯ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ａｔ ０．
１ ．３ Ｐｒｇｏｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ （Ｘ， Ｚ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ）， ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ （Ｕ， Ｗ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ） ａｎｄ ｍｉｘ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ（Ｘ／Ｗ， Ｕ／Ｚ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ） ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ． Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｗｉｔｈ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ （ａｌｌ
ｔｈｅ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ ａｎｄ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｒｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ）．
１ ．３．１ Ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ，ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ
ｄｅｓｔｉｎａｔｉｏｎ．
GSK CNC Equipment Company 45
Page 46
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｘ
Ф
80
Ｚ
Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ Ｂ ｉｓ ｕｓｅｄ ｆｏｒ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｉｎｇ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ
Ｂ．
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ：
Ｘ
Z
Ф50
Ｂ
７０
Ａ
PICTURE 2 ABSOLUTE COORDINATES
１ ．３．２ Ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｉｍａｒｙ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｓｔｉｎａｔｉｏｎ，
ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｔｒａｖｅｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ．
Ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｆｒｏｍ ｐｏｉｎｔ Ａ ｔｏ ｐｏｉｎｔ Ｂ ｉｓ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ．
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ：
Ｘ
７０
PICTURE 3 RELATIVE COORDINATES
Ｂ
１１０
0
Z
1.3.3 Mix coordinates
Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ａｔ ｓａｍｅ ｍｏｍｅｎｔ， ｂｕｔ ｏｎｌｙ
ｏｎｅ ｋｉｎｄ ｏｆ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ｔｏ ｏｎｅ ａｘｉｓ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． X W ｏｒ U Z ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ，
ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ X U ｏｒ Z W ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ． Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ， Ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ Ａ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ Ｂ
ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ３ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ X 0 W— ０．
１．４ Ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ｔｈｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｓ ａ ｓｅｔｔｌｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ． Ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ａｘｅｓ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｓ ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｅｄ． Ａｌｌ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｉｎ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｖａｌｕｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ． Ｇｅｎｅｒａｌｌｙ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｌｉｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ．
Ｃｏｎｓｉｄｅｒｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎｓ， ｔｈｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｓｕｐｅｒｐｏｓｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ
ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｄｒａｗｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
１．５ Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ａｔ ａ ｓａｆｅ ａｎｄ ｃｏｎｖｅｎｉｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ， ｅｖｅｎ ｉｆ ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ａｔ ａｎｙ
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ．
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃａｎ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ ａｎｄ
Ａｕｔｏ ｍｏｄｅ． Ｅｖｅｎ ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｏｗｅｒｓ ｏｆｆ， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｈｅｌｄ． Ｂｕｔ ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｔｅｐ ｍｏｔｏｒ ｉｓ
46 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 47
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
ｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｍｕｌｔｉｓｐｅｅｄ
ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ
ａｘｉｓ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ
ａｘｉｓ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｖａｌｕｅ
ｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ
ｅｍｐｌｏｙｅｄ， ａ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｅｒｒｏｒ ｍａｙ ｂｒｉｎｇ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｏｗｅｒｓ ｏｎ ａｇａｉｎ．
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｐｏｗｅｒｓ ｏｎ ａｆｔｅｒ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚａｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ Ｘ＝１５０，Ｚ＝１５０
II. PROGRAM STRUCTURE
Ｔｈｅ ｅｄｉｔｅｄ ｃｏｌｌｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ＣＮＣ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｓ ｃａｌｌｅｄ ａｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ． Ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ ｏｆ
ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ａｌｏｎｇ ｂｅｅｌｉｎｅ， ａｒｃ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔａｒｔｓｏｒ ｓｔｏｐｓ， ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｐｏｗｅｒｓ ｏｎ／ｏｆｆ．
Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｉｓ ｅｄｉｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｉｇｈｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ａｒｔ．
2.1 Character
Ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｂａｓｉｃｅｓｔ ｕｎｉｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ． Ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｓｏｍｅ ｌｅｔｔｅｒｓ， ｆｉｇｕｒｅｓ ａｎｄ ｓｙｍｂｏｌ．
l Ｌｅｔｔｅｒ： ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｏｒ ｄａｔａ， ｔｏｔａｌ １７ ｌｅｔｔｅｒｓ：
Ｐ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ Ｕ Ｗ Ｘ Ｚ
l Ｆｉｇｕｒｅ： ｔｈｅ ｄａｔａ ｆｏｌｏｏｗｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ
l Ｓｙｍｂｏｌ
％
．
Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｃａｌｅ ｏｆ ｄａｔａ
ｓｙｍｂｏｌ
％ ．
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｉｇｎ ｏｆ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｄａｔｕｍ
Ｄｅｃｉｍａｌ
％ Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ Ｎｏ．
Ｓ ｅｒｉａｌ Ｎｏ．
Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｕｎｉｔ Ｄ ａｔａ ｓｃａｌｅ
Ｐ ｒｅｐａｒｅ
ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔ
ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｔ ｏｏｌ
ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｔ
ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ
ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｒ ｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｍｏｄｅ
Ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ａｎｄ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｉ Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ
００~９９ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
００００~９９９９ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
００~９９ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
００~９９ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
００~９ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
Ｉ
Ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｓ ｐｅｅｄ
ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ｒ ｅｌａｔｉｖｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ｔ ｈｅ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 47
Ｓ ｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
Ｆ ｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｘ Ｚ
ｖａｌｕｅ
Ｘ Ｚ
ｖａｌｕｅ
Ｘ Ｚ
ｆｒ
mm
ｉｎ
０~４
ｍｏｔｏｒ
０~１５
０~Ｐ１１／１２
ｍｏｔｏｒ
／
０~９９９９ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
－８０００．０００~＋８０００．０００
－８０００．０００~＋８０００．０００
－８０００．０００~＋８０００．０００
Page 48
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ａｒｃ ｒａｄｉｕｓ
ｌｏｏｐ ｔａｐｅｒ
Ｍｅｔｒｉｃ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ａｎｄ ａｒｃ
Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ｏｒ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｊｕｍｐ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｃｉｒｃｌｅ
ｃｅｎｔｅｒ
ａｒｃ
2.2 Field
Ａ ｆｉｅｌｄ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ａ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｆｉｇｕｒｅｓ． Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ：
． ．
l Ｅａｃｈ ｆｉｅｌｄ ｍｕｓｔ ｈａｖｅ ａｎ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ （ｌｅｔｔｅｒ） ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｓｔｒｉｎｇ．
l Ｔｈｅ ｚｅｒｏ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ ｓｔｒｉｎｇ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｌｅｆｔ ｏｕｔ．
l Ｔｈｅ ｚｅｒｏ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｐｒｅｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｌｅｆｔ ｏｕｔ． Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： Ｇ００ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｗｒｉｔｔｅｎ ａｓ Ｇ０．
l Ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｓｙｍｂｏｌ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｌｅｆｔ ｏｕｔ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｓｙｍｂｏｌ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｗｒｉｔｔｅｎ ｄｏｗｎ．
ｏｒ ｆｉｘｅｄ
Ｄ ｅｌａｙ ｔｉｍｅ Ｄ ｅｌａｙ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ０．００１
Ｔｈｒｅａｄ
ｐｉｔｃｈ
Ｔｈｒｅａｄ
ｐｉｔｃｈ，
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
ｅｎｔｒｙ
Ｃ ｏｍｐｏｕｎｄ
ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
Ｉｎｃｈ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ
ｄｉｃｔａｅ ｅｎｔｒｙ
Ｌ ｏｏｐ ｄｅｇｒｅｅ， ｔｈｒｅａｄ
ｌｅａｄｓ，ｌｏｏｐ ｏｕｔｌｉｎｅｓ
ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｏｎ．
ｒａｄｉｕｓ
Ｔ ｏｏｔｈ
／ｉｎｃｈ
ｒａｄｉｕｓ ０~８０００．０００
１００~０．２５ Ｔｏｏｔｈ／ｉｎｃｈ
０．０１~９９．９９９
００００~９９９９（ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ）
０．２５~１００（ｔｈｒｅａｄ
ｐｉｔｃｈ）
１~９９
2.3 Serial number
Ａ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｔｔｅｒ Ｎ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ４ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ． Ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｉｎ ｅｄｉｔｉｎｇ， ｂｕｔ ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｍｅｎｄｅｄ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｃａｌｅ ｉｓ ００００￣９９９９．
2.4 Program Segment
Ａ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ａ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ａｎｄ ｓｏｍｅ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ． Ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｃａｎ ｃｏｎｔａｉｎ ２５５
ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒｓ ａｔ ｂｅｓｔ （ｉｎｃｌｕｄｉｎｇ ｓｐａｃｅ）． Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ．
l Ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
l
l
l
l
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ ａｒｅ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｓｐａｃｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｐａｃｅｓ ａｒｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｉｎ ｉｎｐｕｔｔｉｎｇ，
ｂｕｔ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｉｎｐｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｐａｃｅ ｍａｎｕａｌｌｙ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｔｈｅ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ ｃａｎ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｓ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｐｒｅｐａｒｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｅ
nter Ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｅｎｄ （Ｎｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ）． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
2.5 Program structure
Ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｄａｔａ
Ｅ
nter
Ｅｎｔｅｒ
ｔｏ ｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
’
ｔ ｄｉｓｔｉｎｇｕｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｅｌｄｓ．
Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｔｏ ｒｅａｌｉｚｅ ｏｎｅ ｏｒ ｍｏｒｅ ａｒｔ ａｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ｓｏｍｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ｔｏ ｔｒａｎｓａｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ａｒｔ ｏｒｄｅｒｌｙ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ（ｒｏｗ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）ｉｓ
ｆｏｒ ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｃａｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ（ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｎａｍｅ） ｉｓ ｆｏｒ ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｃａｔｉｎｇ
48 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 49
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ
ｃｏｌｕｍｎ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｉ Ｋ
ａｎｄ ｉｎｎｅｒ ｔａｐｅｒ
Ｅｎｄ ｄｒｉｌｌｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ
ａｘｉｓ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ
ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ａｘｉｓ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ
ｔｈｅ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
Ｅａｃｈ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ａｎｄ ｓｏｍｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ． Ｏｎｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｃａｎ ｃｏｎｔａｉｎ ９９９９
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ａｔ ｂｅｓｔ． Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｒｉａｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｉｓ ｌｅｔｔｅｒ Ｎ ａｎｄ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ４ ｂｉｔｅ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
ｉｓ ％ ａｎｄ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ２ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ．
III. DICTATE CODES AND FUNCTIONS
Ｄｅｔａｉｌｅｄｌｙ ｉｎｔｒｏｄｕｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｃｏｄｅｓ， ｔｈｅｉｒ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｎｄ ｕｓａｇｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｃｈａｐｔｅｒ．
3.1
Ｇ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｗｉｓｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ． Ｉｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ａ ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ Ｇ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ２ ｂｉｔｓ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ．
Ｄ ｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｍｏｄａｌｉｔｙ Ｆ ｏｒｍａｔ Ｒ ｅｍａｒｋｓ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 49
functions
Ｇ００ Ｑｕｉｃｋ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｎｉｎｇ
Ｇ０１
Ｇ０２
Ｇ０３
Ｇ３３ Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ＊ Ｇ３３ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｐ （Ｅ） Ｉ Ｋ
Ｇ３２ Ｔ ａｐ ｌｏｏｐ Ｇ３２ Ｚ Ｐ（Ｅ） Ｌ
ｏｕｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｉｎｎｅｒ
Ｇ９０
Ｇ９２
Ｇ９４
Ｇ７４
Ｇ７５
Ｇ７１
Ｇ７２
Ｇ２２ Ｐ ｒｏｇｒａｍ ｌｏｏｐ ｓｔａｒｔ Ｇ２２ Ｌ
Ｇ８０ Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｌｏｏｐ ｅｎｄ Ｇ８０
Ｇ５０ Ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ Ｇ５０ Ｘ Ｚ
Ｇ２６
Ｇ２７
Ｏｕｔｅｒ
Ｏｕｔｅｒ ａｎｄ ｉｎｎｅｒ
ｃｏｌｕｍｎ ｓｌｏｔ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｅｘｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｐｒｉｍａｒｙ
Ｘ Ｚ
Ｘ
ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｂ ｅ ｅｌｉｎｅ
ｉｎｔｅｒｐｏｌａｔｉｏｎ
Ｓ ｕｉｔａｂｌｅ ａｒｃ
ｉｎｔｅｒｐｏｌａｔｉｏｎ
Ｃｏｎｔｒａｒｙ ａｒｃ
ｉｎｔｅｒｐｏｌａｔｉｏｎ
ｌｏｏｐ
ｌｏｏｐ
ｌｏｏｐ
ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｅｎｄ ｐｒｉｍａｒｙ
ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ
prepare functions
ｓｔａｔｅ
＊ Ｇ０１ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ Ｆ Ｆ：５ － ６０００ ／
＊
＊
＊ Ｇ９０ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｒ Ｆ
＊
＊ Ｇ９４ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｒ Ｆ
Ｇ７４ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｉ Ｋ Ｅ Ｆ
Ｇ７５ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｉ Ｋ Ｅ Ｆ
Ｇ７１ Ｘ Ｉ Ｋ Ｆ Ｌ
Ｇ７２ Ｚ Ｉ Ｋ Ｆ Ｌ
Ｇ２６
Ｇ２７
Ｇ００ Ｘ（Ｕ）Ｚ（ ）
Ｇ０２ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｒ Ｆ
Ｇ０２ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ）Ｉ Ｋ Ｆ
Ｇ０３ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ）Ｒ Ｆ
Ｇ０３ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ）Ｉ Ｋ Ｆ
Ｇ９２ Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（ ） Ｐ（Ｅ） Ｌ
Ｒ
Ｆ：５－３０００ ／
Ｆ：５－３０００ ／
Ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｓｅｔ
ｂｙ Ｇ００
Page 50
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ａｘｉｓ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ
X
B
Ｇ２９
Ｇ０４ Ｔ ｉｍｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｄｅｌａｙ Ｇ０４ Ｄ
Ｇ９３ Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ Ｇ９３ Ｘ Ｕ Ｚ Ｗ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ＊ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｔａｂｌｅ ａｒｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕａｌ
ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ Ｇ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｒｕｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｅａｃｈ ｓｅｎｇｍｅｎｔ ｃａｎ ｈａｖｅ ｏｎｌｙ ｏｎｅ Ｇ ｃｏｄｅ ｅｘｅｐｔｉｎｇ ｆｏｒ Ｇ０４． Ｏｎｌｙ ｔｈｅ Ｇ０４ ｃｏｄｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ
ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ Ｇ ｃｏｄ ｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： ｗｈｅｎ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｏｎ ｏｒ ｒｅｓｅｔ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｉｓ ｉｎ Ｇ００ ｓｔａｔｅ．
Ｚ
ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｇ２９
ｍｏｄａｌｉｔｙ
， ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ａｖａｉｌａｂｉｌｉｔｙ ｕｎｔｉｌ
3.1.1
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ ；
Ｇ００ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Quick positionning
， ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｖａｌｕｅ
Z
A
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ４ Ｇ００ ＱＵＩＣＫ ＰＯＳＩＴＩＯＮＮＩＮＧ
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： Ｍｏｖｅ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ ｗｉｔｈ Ｇ００．
Ｗｈｅｎ Ｇ００ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｉｍｅ， Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｏｌｅｌｙ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ
ｆａｓｔｅｓｔ ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｎｄ ａｃｃｅｌｅｒａｔｉｏｎ． Ｉｆ ｏｎｅ ａｘｉｓ ｓｔｏｐｓ ａｒｒｉｖｅｄ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｆｉｒｓｔ， ｔｈｅ
ｏｔｈｅｒ ｗｉｌｌ ｇｏ ｏｎ ｔｉｌｌ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ａｎｄ Ｇ００ ａｒｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ｔｈｅｙ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｍｅｒｇｅｄ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｓｏ ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｓｈｏｒｔｅｎ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ
ｔｉｍｅ ｔｏ ａｄｖａｎｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋ ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ
ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ａｎｄ Ｇ００， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｂｅｔｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｐｕｔ ｔｈｅｍ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｇ００ ｃａｎ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｏｒ ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｎｄｉｖｉｄｕａｌｌｙ．
Ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｇ００ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｓ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒｓ Ｐ０５， Ｐ０６， ａｎｄ ｉｔ ｒｅｌａｔｅｓ ｔｏ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ．
Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
＝
Ｐ ０５ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
＝
Ｐ ０６ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
Ｇ００ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕａｌ ｍｏｄａｌｉｔｙ， ｓｏ ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｇ００ ｉｓ ｅｑｕｉｖａｌｅｎｔ ｔｏ Ｇ０．
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｉｎ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｉｍｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍｅｄ ｉｎ ｓａｆｅ
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．
50 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 51
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
35
Z
3.1.2
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｇ０１ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ａｒｒｉｖｅｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｏｕｓｌｙ．
Ｉｎ Ｇ０１， Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ １５０ ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ． （ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ５）
Ｇ０１ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｃａｎ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｏｒ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｎｄｉｖｉｄｕａｌｌｙ．
Ｔｈｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｇ０１ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ Ｆ， ａｎｄ ｉｔ ｒｅｌａｔｅｓ ｔｏ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ．
Ｇ０１ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕａｌ ｍｏｄａｌｉｔｙ， ｓｏ ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ａｃｔｕａｌ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｇ０１ ｉｓ ｅｑｕｉｖａｌｅｎｔ ｔｏ Ｇ１．
， ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｓｔｉｎａｔｉｏｎ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ．
Ｆ－ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｕｎｉｔ
Beeline interpolation
PICTURE 5 G01 BEELINE INTERPOLATION
＝
Ф45
５０
Ｆ ×
feed speed multpile
Ф20
3.1.3
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ｏｒ
Ｆｉｅｌｄｓ ｉｎ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ：
Ｆ ｉｅｌｄ
Ｉｎ Ｇ０２， Ｇ０３ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ａｌｏｎｇ ａｒｃ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ， Ｇ０２ ｉｓ ｃｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ， Ｇ０３
ｉｓ ａｎｔｉｃｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ． Ｔｈｅ ａｒｃ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍｅｄ ｒｅｆｅｒｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ．
Ｇ０２ Ａｒｃ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ Ｃ ｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ ＣＷ
Ｇ０３ Ａｒｃ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ Ａ ｎｔｉｃｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ ＣＣＷ
Ｘ，Ｚ Ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ Ａｒｃ ｅｎｄｐｏｉｎｔ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
Ｕ，Ｗ Ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ａｒｃ ｓｔａｒｔｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ａｒｃ ｅｎｄｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｉ．Ｋ Ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｏ ａｒｃ ｓｔａｒｔｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｃ ｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ Ｓ ｐｅｃｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｒ Ａｒｃ ｒａｄｉｕｓ
Ｆ Ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｔ ｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ａｒｃ
Arc interpolation
；
； Ｒａｄｉｕｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
； Ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 51
Page 52
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Startpoint
K
I 0'X Z Z X Startpoint
I
Z
Z
G02
X
Ｇ２／Ｇ０３ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ Ｇ０２／Ｇ０３ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
G03
X
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ６ａ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ６ｂ
Ｘ， Ｚ ｏｒ Ｕ， Ｗ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ａｒｃ ｅｎｄｐｏｉｎｔ． Ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
ｏｒ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ． Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ａｒｃ ｓｔａｒｔｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｒｃ ｅｎｄｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ． Ｉ， Ｋ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ， Ｉ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ ｆｒｏｍ ａｒｃ ｓｔａｒｔｐｏｉｎｔ
ｔｏ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ， Ｋ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ ｆｒｏｍ ａｒｃ ｓｔａｒｔｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ Ｉ， Ｋ ｉｓ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｉｓ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ．
Endpoint
Ｔｈｅ ｖａｌｕｅ ｏｆ Ｉ ｉｓ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ， ｂｕｔ ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ， ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｕｌｔ ｏｆ ｄｒａｗｉｎｇ ｉｓ ｒａｄｉｕｓ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｕｌｔ
Ｉ ＞ ０ Ｋ ＞ ０
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ７ ＣＩＲＣＬＥ ＣＥＮＴＥＲ ＣＯＯＲＤＩＮＡＴＥＳ
ｔｉｍｅｓ ２ ｉｎ ｐｅｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ．
Ｔｈｅ ｒａｄｉｕｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ ｉｎ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ Ｉ， Ｋ．
Ф60
Ａ
Ф20
40
Ｂ
R20
Ｘ
60
PICTURE 8 ARC INTERPOLATION
Ａｎｔｉｃｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ ａｒｃ ｉｎｔｅｒｐｏｌａｔｉｏｎ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ， ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ １００ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ （ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ８）．
ｏｒ
６ ４ ０ ０
６ ４ ０
Ｒａｄｉｕｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
４ ２ ０ ０
Ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
４ ２ ０
Ｃｌｏｃｋｗｉｓｅ ａｒｃ ｉｎｔｅｒｐｏｌａｔｉｏｎ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ
６ ４ ０ ０
52 GSK CNC Equipment Company
G03
G02
Endpoint
Ｉ ＜ ０ Ｋ ＜ ０
Ｚ
Ｃｉｒｃｌｅ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
Page 53
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
20
50
X
ｏｒ
６ ４ ０
；
４ ２ ０ ０
４ ２ ０
Ｒａｄｉｕｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
；
；
３ ．１．４ Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｆｏｒｍａｔ ： Ｐ Ｋ Ｉ；
Ｔｈｅ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ／ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｅｎｄ． （Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｓｔｒａｉｇｈｔ
ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｘ ｉｓ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ）
Ｐ
Ｍｅｔｒｉｃ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ， ｕｎｉｔ： ｍｍ， ｓｃａｌｅ： ０．２５￣１００ｍｍ
Ｉｎｃｈ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｎ， ｕｎｉｔ： ｔｏｏｔｈ／ｉｎｃｈ， ｓｃａｌｅ：１００￣０．２５ｔｏｏｔｈ／ｉｎｃｈ
Ｋ
Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｉｔ－ｔｏｏｌｔｒａｉｌ ｉｎ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
Ｕｎｉｔ：ｍｍ， ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｈａｓ ｎｏｔ ｅｘｉｔ－ｔｏｏｌｔｒａｉｌ ｗｈｅｎ Ｋ ｉｓ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ．
Ｉｎ ｓｔｒａｉｇｈｔ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｉｔｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｅｘｉｔ－ｔｒａｉｌ ｉｎ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｈｅｎ Ｋ＞０； ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｉｔｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｅｘｉｔ－ｔｒａｉｌ ｉｎ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｈｅｎ Ｋ＜０．
Ｉｎ ｔａｐｅｒ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｕｓｔ ｅｘｉｔ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｉ
Ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｖｅｌ ｏｆ ｅｘｉｔ－ｔｏｏｌｔｒａｉｌ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ（ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ）， ｕｎｉｔ：ｍｍ． Ｗｈｅｎ Ｋ ｉｓ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ， ｔｈｅ
ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ ｉｓ I=2 K （45 exit-tooltrail)．
Ｔｈｅ ｓｔｒａｉｇｈｔ ｔｈｒｅａｄ， ｔａｐｅｒ ｔｈｒｅａｄ， ｉｎｔｅｒｎａｌ ｔｈｒｅａｄ， ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ａｎｄ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｃｏｍｍｏｎ ｔｈｒｅａｄｓ
ｃａｂ ｂｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｇ３３
Z
1.5
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ９， ＴＨＲＥＡＤ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ Ｘ（Ｕ） ｉｓ ｎｏｔ ｚｅｒｏ ｉｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｇ３３， ｔｈｅ ｔａｐｅｒ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｉｓ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｕｎｓ
ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ， ｔｈｅ ｄｅｘｔｒｏｒｏｔａｒｙ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｉｓ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ； Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｕｎｓ ｂａｃｋｗａｒｄ， ｔｈｅ
ｌｅｖｏｒｏｔａｔｏｒｙ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｉｓ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ ｂａｃｋｗａｒｄ．
Ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ａ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｃｏｕｒｓｅ ｍａｎｙ ｔｉｍｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ． Ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｓｔａｒｔｓ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｔｒａｉｌ ｉｓ ｓａｍｅ ｉｎ ｒｅｐｅａｒｔｉｎｇ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇｓ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｍｕｓｔ
ｂｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ａ ｆｅｗ ｅｒｒｏｒｓ ｍａｙ ｈａｐｐｅｎ．
Ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ａｐｒｏｐｏｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｉｓ ｔｏｏ ｈｉｇｈ，
ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｒｅｓｐｏｎｄ ｉｎ ｔｉｍｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄａｍａｇｅｄ．
Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｃｏｍｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ：
Ｎ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｕｎｉｔ：ｒｐｍ ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｒｅｖ＜２０００ｒｐｍ
Ｒ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ｕｎｉｔ：ｍｍ
≦ ３ ０ ０ ０
Ｉｎｃｈ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ ｉｎｔｏ ｍｅｔｒｉｃ ｕｎｉｔ．
Ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｃｔｈ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ａｎｄ ｅｎｄ ｉｓ ｎｏｔ ｕｎｐｒｅｃｉｓｅ ｄｕｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｖ ｓｈｉｆｔ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ｌｅｎｇｔｈ ｉｓ ｌｏｎｇｅｒ ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｌｅｎｇｔｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ． Usually, the length at the start is longer
then 1.3mm
GSK CNC Equipment Company 53
Page 54
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ф１５
X
2
ＰＩＣＴＵＲ １０ ＴＨＲＥＡＤ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ
Ｆｏｒ ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ： ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ４ ｍｍ， ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｄｅｐｔｈ ２ ｍｍ （ｔｗｉｃｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ）． Ｒｅ． ＰＩＣＵＴＲＥ １０：
Ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｆｅｅｄ １ｍｍ， （ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ）
Ｐ Ｆｉｒｓｔ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｉｔｓ ２ｍｍ
Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ
Ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｆｅｅｄ １ｍｍ
Ｐ Ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｉｔｓ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｅｘｉｔｓ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ ａｒｅ ｉｎｅｆｆｅｃｔｉｖｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｔｏｐｓ ａｓ ｓｏｏｎ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｔｈｅ ｐｈｏｔｏｅｌ ｅｃｔｒｉｃｉｔｙ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ １２００ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｏｒ １０２４ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎｓｔａｌｌｅｄ ａｎｄ ｉｔ ｒｏｔａｔｅｓ
ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｓｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ １２００ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｉｓ ｉｎｓｔａｌｌｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
Ｐ１１ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ａｔ ０； ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｃｏｄｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ １０２４ ｌｉｎｅｓ ｉｎ ｉｎｓｔａｌｌｅｄ， ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｓｈｏｌｄ
ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ａｔ １． Ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ｉｓ ｉｎｃｏｒｒｅｃｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ４： Ｔｏ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｅｘｉｔ－ｔｏｏｌ ｔｒａｉｌ， ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ， ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ， ｓｐｅｅｄｕｐ ｔｉｍｅ ｉｎ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ａｎｄ ｒａｔｉｏ ｏｆ Ｉ／Ｋ ａｆｆｅｃｔ ｔｈｅｅｘｉｔ－ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｒａｉｌ ｌｅｎｇｔｈ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ５： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｔｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
ｔｏｏ， ｗｈｅｎ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． Ｔ ｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｅｎｄｓ ｉｓｎ
ｅ．ｇ． Ｇ３３ Ｗ － ２０ Ｐ３： Ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｆ ｏｎｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｗｈｅｎ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｇ３３ Ｗ － ３０ Ｐ２： Ｄｏｎ’ｔ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｆ ｏｎｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｗｈｅｎ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Z
’
ｔ ｃｈｅｃｋｅｄ．
３．１．５ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｔａｐ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ
Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ｏｆ ｍｅｔｒｉｃ ｔｈｒｅａｄ
Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｐｉｔｃｈ ｏｆ ｉｎｃｈ ｔｈｒｅａｄ
ｅｎｄｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ， ｓｃａｌｅ：１￣９９ ｅｎｄｓ
３２ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｔａｐ ｌｏｏｐ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ：
１ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｆｅｅｄ ｔａｐｐｉｎｇ
２ Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ
３ Ｗａｉｔ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｓｔ
４ Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖｅｒｓｅｓ
５ Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
６ Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ
54 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｔｈ ｌｅｎｇｔｈ
Page 55
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｓ ｄｅｐｔｈ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ａｎｄ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｂｒａｋｅ．
0 XX
Z
X
30
10
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １１ Ｇ３２ ＴＡＰ ＬＯＯＰ
ｅ．ｇ． ｓｉｎｇｌｅｅｎｄ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｌｅａｄ ２ ｍｍ
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
Ｔａｐ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｇａｉｎ
Ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｔｏ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｔａｐｐｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｔａｐ
ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐｓ． Ｉｆ ｉｓ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｔｏ
ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓ ｔｏ ｔａｐ， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｓｔａｒｔｅｄ ａｇａｉｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： ｔｈｉｓ ｉｓ ｒｉｇｉｄ ｔａｐｐｉｎｇ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．Ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｆ ｓｔｏｐｐｉｎｇ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｉｓ ｓｅｎｔ ｏｕｔ，
ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｎｅｅｄｓ ａ ｍｏｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｄｏｗｎ． Ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｌｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ
ｆｏｒ ａ ｍｏｍｅｎｔ． Ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｂａｓｉｃ ｈｏｌｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｄｅｅｐｅｒ ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｅｄｅｄ ｈｏｌｅ．
Ｔ ｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｈｏｌｅ
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｃａｕｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｓａｍｓ ａｓ ｔｈｅ Ｇ３３．
’
Z
３．１．６ Ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｓｅｔｕｐ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ａ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｎｄ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎｔｅｓ． Ａｓ
ｓｏｏｎ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｓ ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｅｄ， ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｎｉｄａｔｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ
ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ｂｅｌｏｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ．
Ｔｈｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ， ｔｈｅ ｏｒｉｇｉｎ ｉｎ Ｘ
ａｘｉｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｈｕｃｋ ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅｓ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １２．
0
Z
150
50
Ф100
Ф100
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １２ａ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １２ｂ
(a)
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １２ Ｇ５０ ＷＯＲＫＰＩＥＣＥ ＣＯＯＲＤＩＮＡＴＥＳ ＳＥＴＵＰ
：Ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｉｎ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
：Ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｉｎ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
(b)
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｗｈｅｎ Ｇ５０ ｉｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｉｓ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｉｆ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｗｉｔｈ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 55
Page 56
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
X
A
Ｇ５０． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｓａｍｅ， ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｒｕｎ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅｙ ａｒ ｎｏｔ ｓａｍｅ， ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
ｐｏｉｎｔ？ Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ Ｅｎｔｅｒ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｈｅｎ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ｏｒ
ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＲＵＮ ｔｏ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｎｄ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｇ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ＥＳＣ ｔｏ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅｉ
ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ｇ００ ｓｔａｔｅ．
３．１．７ Ｄｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ （ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ） ｗｉｔｈ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ． Ｔｈｅ
Ｇ２６’ｓ ｅｘｅｃｕｔｉｏｎ ｍｏｄｅ ｉｓ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｇ００’ｓ．
Z
Ｂ
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １３ Ｇ２６ ＲＥＴＵＲＮ ＴＯ ＴＨＥ ＲＥＦＥ ＲＥＮＣＥ ＰＯＩＮＴ
Reference point
Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｔｏ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ：
The tool returns to the reference ｐｏｉｎｔ in X Z axes from A to B with their respective speed defined by
the quick move speed and the quick move speed multpile .
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒ ｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｂｙ Ｇ２６， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃａｎ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔｌｙ ｏｎｌｙ ｂｙ ｄｅｆｉｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
Ｘ，Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｂｙ Ｇ００．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｂｙ Ｇ２６ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ Ｇ００
ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｂｙ Ｇ２６， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ａｒｅ ｄｅｌｅｔｅｄ．
’
ｓ ｓｐｅｅｄ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｒｅｌａｔｅｄ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ
３．１．８ Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Return to the reference point in X axis by G27 with the speed defined by the Max rev and the quick
move speed multiple, and delete the tool offset and the system offset in X axis. When the tool offset is 0 in Z axis,
display the tool offset 0.
３．１．９ Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Return to the reference point in Z axis by G29 with the speed defined by the Max rev and the quick move
speed multiple, and delete the tool offset and the system offset in Z axis. When the tool offset is 0 in X axis,
display the tool offset 0.
Ｎｏｔｅ ： Ｔｈｅ ｃａｕｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ Ｇ２７ ａｎｄ Ｇ２９ ａｒｅ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｇ２６
’
ｓ．
３．１．１０ Ｔｉｍｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｄｅｌａｙ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｄ Ｄｅｌａｙ ｔｉｍｅ Ｕｎｉｔ： ｓｅｃｏｎｄ Ｓｃａｌｅ：０．００１￣９９．９９９ ｓｅｃｏｎｄ
Ｇ０４ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｐａｃｅ ｔｉｍｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｗｏ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ
ｅ．ｇ． Ｇ０４ Ｄ２．５ ｄｅｌａｙ ２．５ｓｅｃｏｎｄｓ
３．１．１１ Ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅａｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｓｅｔｕｐ Ｇ９６ Ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅａｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｃａｎｃｅｌ Ｇ９７
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
56 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 57
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
R/2
Feed speed
Ｓ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅａｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｉｎ Ｇ９６． Ｕｎｉｔ： Ｍ／ｍｉｎ
Ｓ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅａｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｉｎ Ｇ９７． Ｕｎｉｔ： ｒｐｍ
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅ ｉ ｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅａｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ ｏｎｌｙ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｐｌｕｒａｌ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＭＤＳＰ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔｅｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ， ｔｈｅ ｉ ｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅａｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｉｓ ｉｎｅｆｆｅｃｔｉｖｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ ｏｒ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ
ｓｙｓｔｅｍ． Ｔ ｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔ ｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｃａｎｃｅｌｌｅｄ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｉｎ Ｇ００ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｖａｌｉｄ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｏｆ Ｇ００． Ｉｎ Ｇ０１， Ｇ０２，
Ｇ０３ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ， ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ ａｔ ａｎｙ ｍｏｍｅｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ４： ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖ ｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ Ｐ０９， Ｐ１０． Ｔｈｅ ｍｉｎ． ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ２５ｒｐｍ
ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ ｂｙ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ５： ｔｈｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ Ｓ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅｓ ｔｏ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｒａｃｋ．
Ｉｔ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ａｎｄ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ６： ｔｈｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ａｘｉｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ （Ｘ＝０）．
Ｎｏｔｅ ７： Ｇ９６ ｉｓ ｍｏｄｕｌａｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ Ｇ９６ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ， ｔｈｅ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ８： Ｉｎ Ｄｒｙ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕ ｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ． Ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｃａｎ
ｂｙ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ Ｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ９： Ｉｎ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ． Ｂｕｔ Ｉｎ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ，
ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｌｉｎｅｒ ｖｅｌｏｃｉｔｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｉｎ Ｇ９７， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｔ ｈｅ ｉｎｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ ｒｅｖ．
’
ｔ ｂｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ
３．１．１２ Ｓｉｍｐｌｅｘ ｓｅｔｔｌｅｄ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｉｎ ｓｏｍｅ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｂｉｇ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｒｅｐｅａｔｓ ｍａｎｙ ｔｉｍｅｓ．
Ｆｏｒ ｓｉｍｐｌｉｆｙ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ， ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ ｏｆ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｓｉｍｐｌｅｘ
ｓｅｔｔｌｅｄ ｌｏｏｐ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ｅｘｐｅｄｉｅｎｔｌｙ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ
ｏｆ ｔｈｉｓ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ． Ｉｆ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｔｈｉｓ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｄａｔａ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ
ｓａｍｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｎｏ ｎｅｅｄ ｔｏ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｇａｉｎ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅ Ｇ， Ｍ， Ｓ， Ｔ ａｎｄ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ， ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ ｉｓ ｏｖｅｒ．
3.1.12.1
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｘ Ｕ Ｚ Ｗ Ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｙｌｉｎｄｅｒ （ｃｏｎｅ）． Ｔｈｅ ｔｗｏ ａｘｅｓ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｇｉｖｅｎ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｚｅｒｏ．
Ｒ Ｔｈｅ ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ ｂａｌａｎｃｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ． Ｉｔ’ｓ
ｔｈｅ ａｘｉｓ ｆａｃｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｉｆ Ｒ ｉｓ ｏｍｉｔｔｅｄ．
Ｆ Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ
X/2
Inner and outer cylinder machining loop
Z
W
Quick move speed
U/2
C
B
A
D
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １４ ＩＮＥＲ ＡＮＤ ＯＵＴＥＲ ＣＹＬＩＮＤＥＲ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ ＬＯＯＰ
Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ Ｇ９０ ｌｏｏｐ：
GSK CNC Equipment Company 57
Page 58
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
R/2
R/2
D
R/2
R/2
30
１． Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ ａｌｏｎｇ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ．
２． Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｂ ｔｏ Ｃ ａｌｏｎｇ Ｘ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ（Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｄｏｅｓｎ’ｔ
ｍｏｖｅ ａｌｏｎｇ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ）．
３． Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｅｅｄｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ｃ ｔｏ Ｄ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
４． Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ｄ ｔｏ Ａ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ．
After finish the G90 loop, the tool is at the start point of this dictate. When the X axis (or relative coordinate
U) of the end point is defined again, the loop runs with the new X (U) axis.
In relative coordinates, U is defined from A to B. W is defined from B to C.
In cone machining loop, R is from C to B.
The data followin g the U W R are as follows:
1 U 0 W 0 R 0 2 U 0 W 0 R 0
C
D
W
B
U/2
A
C
B
U/2
A
W
3 U 0 W 0 R 0 4 U 0 W 0 R 0
D
U/2
C
W
B
A
U/2
D
C
W
A
B
40
C2
C1
B2
B1
B
D
A
Ｆｉｒｓｔ ｆｅｅｄ ５ Ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｆｅｅｄ ２ Ｆｅｅｄｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ＝ ／
ｌｏｏｐ ｏｎｃｅ Ａ Ｄ Ｃ Ｄ
Ｘ３ ５
ｆｉｒｓｔ ｆｅｅｄ ａｎｄ ｌｏｏｐ Ａ Ｂ１ Ｃ１ Ｄ
Ｘ３ ３ ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｆｅｅｄ ａｎｄ ｌｏｏｐ Ａ Ｂ２ Ｃ２ Ｄ
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ａｂｏｖｅ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｓｔａｙｓ ａｔ Ａ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎｎｅｒ ａｎｄ ｏｕｔｅｒ ｃｙｌｉｎｄｅｒ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｆｅｅｄ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ａｒｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ｘ，Ｚ
ａｘｅｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｇ９０ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ＢＬＯＣＫ ｍｏｄｅ， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｏｎｃｅ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｏｎｅ ｌｏｏｐ ａｎｄ ｓｔａｙ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
58 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 59
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
R/2
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ａｆｔｅｒ ｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｓ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ４： Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｍｏｖｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｏｒ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ Ｇ， Ｍ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ，
ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ ｉｓ ｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ５： Ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ Ｓ ｉｍｐｌｅｘ ｓｅｔｔｌｅｄ ｌｏｏｐｓ ａｒｅ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｇ９０ ｌｏｏｐ．
3.1.12.2
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｘ（Ｕ） Ｚ（Ｗ） Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ
Ｐ Ｐｉｔｃｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍｅｔｒｉｃ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｓｃａｌｅ： ０．２５~１００mm
Ｅ Ｌｅａｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｃｈ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｓｃａｌｅ： １００~０．２５ｔｅｅｔｈ／ｉｎｃｈ
Ｉ Ｔｒａｖｅｌ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｔｒｉａｌ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ． Ｉｆ Ｋ ０， ｔｈｅ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ Ｉ ｉｓ ｔｗｉｃｅ ｏｆ Ｋ，
４５ ．
Ｋ Ｂａｌａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｔｒａｉｌ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｒ Ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｂａｌａｎｃｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ （Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｔａｐｅｒ Ｒ
ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ ｗｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｓｔｒａｉｇｈｔ ｔｈｒｅａｄ）
Ｌ Ｅｎｄｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅｘ ｔｈｒｅａｄ（ Ｌ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ ｗｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｅｎｄ ｔｈｒｅａｄ） ｓｃａｌｅ：１￣９９．
Ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ＜０， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｉｓ ｐｏｉｓｔｉｖｅ （Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ）． Ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ＞０， ｔｈｅ Ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ
（ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ）．
Ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ＝０ ｂｕｔ Ｋ ０， ｔｈｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｃｉｄｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｏｆ Ｋ． Ｉｆ
Ｋ＞０， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｉｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ （ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ ｏｆ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ）．Ｉｆ Ｋ＜０， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ （Ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ
Ｘ ａｘｉｓ）．
Thread machining loop
X/2
W
切削进给
U/2
C
D
K
I/2
B
快速进给
A
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １５ Ｇ９２ ＴＨＲＥＡＤ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ ＬＯＯＰ
Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ Ｇ９２ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｌｏｏｐ：
１． Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
２． Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｔｏ Ｃ （Ｉｎｃ． ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｔｒａｉｌ） ｉｎ ｘ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｅｓ．
３． Ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｔｏ Ｄ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
４． Ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｔｏ Ａ （ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ） ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
５． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅｘ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｉｓ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ， ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｂｏｖｅ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｆｒｏｍ １ ｔｏ ４．
Ｆｅｅｄｉｎｇ ｍａｎｙ ｔｉｍｅｓ ｉｓ ｎｅｓｓａｒｙ ｔｏ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ． Ｊｕｓｔ ｎｅｅｄ ｔｏ ａｍｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ
ｐｏｉｎｔ （ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｃｒｅｍｅｎｔ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ）． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ
ｉｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ．
The relations between the ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ of R, K and the tool trail are as follows:
GSK CNC Equipment Company 59
Page 60
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
R/2
D
R/2
D
1 R 0 2 R 0
C
3 R=0 K 0 4 R=0 K 0
C
D
A
B
B
A
C
B
A
D
A
C
B
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １６ ＴＨＥ ＲＥＬＡＴＩＯＮＳ ＢＥＴＷＥＥＮ ＴＨＥ ＴＨＥ ＰＯＳＩＴＩＶＥＮＥＧＡＴＩＶＥ ＯＦ Ｒ， Ｋ ＡＮＤ ＴＨＥ ＴＯＯＬ ＴＲＡＩＬ ＩＮ Ｇ９２
ＬＯＯＰ
3.1.12.3
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｘ Ｕ Ｚ Ｗ Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ． Ｔｈｅ ｔｗｏ ａｘｅｓ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ． Ａｎｄ
ｔｈｅ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｚｅｒｏ．
Ｒ Ｔｈｅ ｂａｌａｎｃｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔａｐｅｒ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．ｉｔ
ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ．
Ｆ Ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Endface of inner/outer column (taper) machining loop
R W
C
X/2
D
U/2
Feed
Quick move
A
B
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １７ Ｇ９４ ＥＮＤＦＡＣＥ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ ＬＯＯＰ
Ｔｈｅ Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｇ９４ ｌｏｏｐ：
１ Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ．
２ Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｂ ｔｏ Ｃ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｅｓ （ ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｈａｓｎ’ｅ
ｍｏｖｅ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ）
３ Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｃ ｔｏ Ｄ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
４ Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｒｏｍ Ｄ ｔｏ Ａ．
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ Ｇ９４ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ． Ｉｆ ｏｎｌｙ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ （ｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ Ｗ） ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｇａｉｎ， ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｌｏｏｐ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ
60 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 61
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
R
D
R
D
R
A
R
A
25
ｒｕｎ．
Ｉｎ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｏｆ Ｕ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｂ ｔｏ Ｃ ｉｎ ａｘｉｓ． ｔｈｅ
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｏｆ Ｗ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｉｎ ｔａｐｐｅｒ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｏｆ Ｒ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｃ ｔｏ Ｂ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
C1
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １８ Ｇ９４ ＬＯＯＰ
ｅ．ｇ． Ａｂｏｖｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ：
Ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｓ ５ ｍｍ， ｔｈｅ ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｓ １．５ｍｍ， ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ８０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
The relations between the data following U W R and the tool trail are as follows:
1 U 0 W 0 R 0 2 U 0 W 0 R 0
B
C2
40
．
C
B1 B2
B
D
A
The first loop from A to D by B and C
The second loop from A to D by B1 and C1
The first loop from A to D by B2 and C2
C
U/2
W
A
B
A
W
U/2
3 U 0 W 0 R 0 4 U 0 W 0 R 0
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ １９ The relations between the data following U W R and the tool trail
３．１．１２．４ Ｔｈｅ ｄｅｅｐ ｈｏｌｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ｈｏｌｅ ｄｒｉｌｌｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｉ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｅａｃｈ ｔｉｍｅ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 61
C
B
W
U/2
D
B
C
D
W
Ｘ Ｕ Ｚ Ｗ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｈｏｌｅ ｂｏｔｔｏｍ． Ｗｈｅｎ Ｘ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｅｐ
U/2
Page 62
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
B
C
15
Ｋ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｖｅｌ ｏｆ ｔｏｏｌｅｘｉｔ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Ｒ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｐｅｃｋ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ａｎｄ ｄｅｅｐ ｈｏｌｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ． Ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ
ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ ｏｒ Ｒ ｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ， ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｖｅｌ ｏｆ ｔｏｏｅｘｉｔ ｉｓ ｏｎｌｙ Ｋ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｅｃｋ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
Ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ ０， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｉｔ ｉｓ
ｔｈｅ ｄｅｅｐ ｈｏｌｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
Ｅ ｅａｃｈ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ ｘ ａｘｉｓ （ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ）
Ｆ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
K
I
E
X/2
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２０ Ｇ７４ ＰＥＣＫ ＤＲＩＬＬＩＮＧ ＬＯＯＰ
Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｅｐ ｈｏｌｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ Ｇ７４：
1 Feed for the distance I in Z axis with the speed F.
2 Escape for the distance K quickly in Z axis.
3 Feed for the distance I+K with the speed F in Z axis
4 Repeat above steps 2, 3 to B in Z axis.
5 The quick excursion in X axis is E if X isn’t zero.
6 Repeat above steps 1~4 to C in X axis, to B in Z axis.
7 Return to C quickly in Z axis, to A in X axis.
Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ Ｇ７４ ｌｏｏｐ．
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｔｈｅ ｗｉｄｔｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｉｇｎｏｒｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｔｈｅ ｂａｌａｎｃｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ
ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｗｉｄｔｈ （ｄｅｃｉｄｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ）．
Ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２０ Ｔｈｅ ｄｅｅｐ ｈｏｌｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ， ｔｏｏｌ ｗｉｄｔｈ ｉｓ ５ｍｍ， ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｓ ６ｍｍ，ｏｎｃｅ
ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｉｓ ２ｍｍ， ｏｎｃｅ ｅｘｃｕｒｓｉｏｎ ｉｓ ５ｍｍ， ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ １００ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ．
PICTURE 21 Ｔｈｅ ｄｅｅｐ ｈｏｌｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ
Ｎ００５０ Ｇ０ Ｘ５ Ｚ４０ Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｎ００６０ Ｇ７４ Ｘ５０ Ｚ２０ Ｉ６ Ｋ２ Ｅ５ Ｆ１００ Ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ Ｘ＋Ｔｏｏｌ
ｗｉｄｔｈ．
20
X
50
Z
62 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 63
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
K
E
A
C
I
D EF
H
Ｗｈｅｎ Ｒ ０ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ Ｇ７４ ｌｏｏｐ：
Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ａ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｍｏｖｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ｃ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｃ ｔｏ Ｄ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ａ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｍｏｖｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ｅ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｅ ｔｏ Ｆ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ａ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｍｏｖｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ｇ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ｇ ｔｏ Ｈ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ Ａ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
PICTURE 22 G74 DEEPHOLE MACHINING LOOP
G
F feed speed
A
Quick move speed
3.1.12.5
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
I feed in X axis at a time
K escape in X axis at a time
E excursion in Z axis at a time
F feed speed
X U Z W the coordinates of the slot endpoint. When Z defaults, it is cutoff loop.
Sloting loop
I
W
PICTURE 23 G75 SLOTING LOOP
GSK CNC Equipment Company 63
Page 64
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
70
I
Start
X U
Z
The process of G75 sloting loop:
1. Feed for the distance I in X axis with speed F.
2. Escape for K in X axis with quick move speed.
3. Feed for the distance I+K in X axis with speed F.
4. Repeat above steps 2, 3 to B in X axis.
5. If Z is not zero, then the tool moves quickly for excursion E in Z axis with the quick move speed.
6. Repeat above steps 1~4 to C in Z axis, B in X axis.
7. Return quickly to C in X axis, and return quickly to A in Z axis.
After G75 loop, the tool returns to the start point.
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｔｈｅ ｗｉｄｔｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｉｇｎｏｒｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｔｈｅ ｂａｌａｎｃｅ ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ
ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｗｉｄｔｈ （ｄｅｃｉｄｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ）． Ｉ， Ｋ， Ｅ ａｒｅ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ．
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２３ ｓｌｏｔｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｏｏｌ ｗｉｄｔｈ ５ｍｍ， ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ６ｍｍ， ｏｎｃｅ ｅｓｃａｐｅ ２ｍｍ， ｏｎｃｅ ｅｘｃｕｒｓｉｏｎ
５ｍｍ， ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ １５０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎｍ．
PICTUR 24 SLOTING LOOP
Ｎ００３０ Ｇ０ Ｘ６０ Ｚ１００ Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｎ００４０ Ｇ７５ Ｘ２０ Ｚ３５ Ｉ６ Ｋ２ Ｅ Ｆ１５０ Ｓｌｏｔｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｐｌｕｓ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｗｉｄｔｈ．
30
X
20
60
３．１．１３ Ｃｏｍｐｏｕｎｄ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｆｏｒ ｓｉｍｐｌｉｆｙｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｒｅｄｕｃｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｃａｌｃｕｌａｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｏｕｎｄ ｌｏｏｐ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
ｉｓ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｈａｐｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｉｓ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍｅｄ ｉｎ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｐａｔｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
3.1.13.1
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｘ Ｕ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｏｆ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｉ – Ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ （ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ）
Ｋ Ｏｎｃｅ ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ （ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ）
Ｌ Ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ ｏｆ Ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｒａｉｌ （ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｉｔｓｅｌｆ）．
Ｓｃａｌｅ： １￣９９．
Ｆ Ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Z
Outer column rough machining loop
K
Feed speed
Quick move speed
PICTURE 25 OUTER COLUMN ROUGH MACHINING LOOP
64 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 65
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
A
Ｐ ｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ Ｇ７２ ｌｏｏｐ：
Ｍｏｖｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｆｏｒ Ｉ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｆｏｒ Ｋ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｋ．
Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｆｏｒ Ｉ＋Ｋ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｂｏｖｅ ｓｔｅｐｓ ２￣５ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｒｕｎ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｒａｉｌ ｔｏ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈａｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｆｏｕｒ ｋｉｎｄ ｏｆ ｓｈａｐｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ Ｇ７１ Ｌｏｏｐ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ２６． Ａｎｄ ａｌｌ ａｒｅ ｆｅｅｄｅｄ ａｌｏｎｇ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ａｓ
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ２５．
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２６ ＴＨＥ ＳＨＡＰＥＳ ＯＦ Ｇ７１ ＬＯＯＰ
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｄｅｉｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ， ｔｈｅ Ｇ０１， Ｇ０２， Ｇ０３ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｃａｂ ｂｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ
ｏｆ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｅｓ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｋｅｐｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｍｐｌｅｘ ｉｎｃｒｅｍｅｎｔ ｏ ｒ ｒｅｄｕｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｄｅｉｆｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏｍ Ａ ｔｏ Ｂ， ｔｈｅ ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｃａｎ
Ｎｏｔｅ ４： Ａｆｔｅｒ Ｇ７２ ｌｏｏｐ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｓｔａｙｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ５： Ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｏｕｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｉｌ ｒｅｃｔａｎｇｌｅ， ａｎｄ ｍｏｖｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｅｎｄ ｔｒａｉｌ ｂｙ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ６： Ｔｈｅ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｆｏｌｌｏｗ ｔｈｉｓ Ｇ７１ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ７： Ｉ， Ｋ ｉｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ａｒｅ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ， ｔｈｅ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｆｅｅｄ ａｎｄ ｅｓｃａｐｅ ａｒｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ
ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
８０
15
55
’
ｔ ｂｅ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒｒｅｄ．
PICTURE 27 G71 LOOP
Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２０， ｒｏｄ ８２， ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ４ｍｍ， ｅｓｃａｐｅ ２．５ｍｍ， ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
６０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ， ｈｉｇｈｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｃｌｏｓｅｓ ｔｏ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｉｎ ｘ ａｘｉｓ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 65
Page 66
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Quick move speed
K Z X
． Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｆ ｒｏｕｇｈ
ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｃｌｏｓｅ ｔｏ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ
Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｓｔｏｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
Ｓｔｏｐ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
Ｅｎｄ
~
Ｄｅｉｎｆ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｒａｉｌ
3.1.13.2
Endface rough machining loop
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｚ Ｗ Ｔｈｅ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ｏｆ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｉ Ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Ｋ Ｏｎｃｅ ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Ｌ Ｔｈｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ ｏｆ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｒａｉｌ（ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｉｔｓｅｌｆ）． Ｓｃａｌｅ １￣９９
Ｆ Ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Feed speed
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２８ Ｇ７２ ＥＮＤＦＡＣＥ ＲＯＵＧＨ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ ＬＯＯＰ
Z(W)
Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ Ｇ７２ ｌｏｏｐ：
Ｔｏｏｌ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｆｏｒ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ Ｉ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ． Ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ．
Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｆｏｒ Ｋ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ
Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｔｏｏｌ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｆｏｒ Ｉ＋Ｋ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｂｏｖｅ ｓｔｅｐｓ ２￣５ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｍｏｖｅｓ ａｌｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｒａｉｌ ａｎｄ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
66 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｉｎ Ｇ７２ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｆｅｅｄ ａｌｏｎｇ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｒａｉｌ， ｔｈｅ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ Ｘ ， Ｚ ａｘｅｓ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｋｅｐｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｍｐｌｅｘ
ｉｎｃｒｅｍｅｎｔ ｏｒ ｒｅｄｕｃｔｉｏｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｃａｕｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｇ７１．
Page 67
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
20
15
20
１６０ ８０ 180
30
X
Z
PICTURE 29 G72 LOOP
Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ａｓ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ２８， ｒｏｄ １６０， ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ５ｍｍ， ｅｓｃａｐｅ ３ｍｍ， ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ８０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ．
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ， ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｓ０２
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
Ｃｌｏｓｅ ｔｏ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ ｏｆ ｒｏｕｇｈ
ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｏｐ
： Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｔｒａｉｌ
Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ
Ｓｔｏｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
Ｓｔｏｐ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
Ｅｎｄ
20
３ ．１．１４ Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｉｎ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｏ ｓｏｍｅ ｐａｒｔｓ ｎｅｅｄ ｔｏ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｏｒ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｎｔｏ ｂｅ ｓｈａｐｅｄ， ｔｈｅ
ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ ｌｏｏｐ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ ｔｏ ｓｉｍｐｌｉｆｙ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ． Ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ
ｌｏｏｐ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ｂｙ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ． Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｔｈｉｓ
ｌｏｏｐ．
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ Ｇ２２ ａｎｄ Ｇ８０ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｃｏｕｐｌｅｓ． Ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ ｌｏｏｐ， ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｇ２２ ｃａｎ ’ｔ
ｒｅｐｅａｔ．
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
：
Ｌ
Ｔｉｍｅｓ ｏｆ ｌｏｏｐ， ｓｃａｌｅ： １￣９９． Ｉｔ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ ｗｈｅｎ Ｌ＝１．
Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ ｏｆ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ ｌｏｏｐ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｔｉｍｅｓ ｏｆ ｌｏｏｐ ｗｉｔｈ Ｌ．
Ｔｈｅ ｐａｒｔｓ ｏｆ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｆｏｒ ｌｏｏｐ
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｉｍｅｓ （Ｌ－１） ｌｏｏｐ， Ｇ８０ ｓｔｏｐｓ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ． Ｉｆ Ｌ－１ ０， ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ ｗｉｌｌ ｇｏ ｏｎ． Ｉｆ Ｌ －１＝０，
ｔｈｅ ｌｏｏｐ ｅｎｄｓ ｔｏ ｇｏ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
Ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｈａｐｅｄ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｖｅｒｙ ｃｏｎｖｅｎｉｅｎｔ ａｎｄ ｈｉｇｈ ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｔ
ｔｏ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｗｉｔｈ Ｇ２２ ａｎｄ Ｇ８０，
GSK CNC Equipment Company 67
Page 68
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
20
30
30
Ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｂｌａｎｋ ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ２９， ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ３ｍｍ， ｏｎｃｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ２．５ｍｍ．
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｉｎ ａｂｏｖｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌｏｗａｎｃｅ
ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｅｎｓｕｒｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ６ｍｍ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ， ５ｍｍ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｂｙ Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｂｌｏｃｋ ｍｏｄｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ．
X
ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ３０ ＭＡＣＨＩＮＩＮＧ ＷＩＴＨ Ｇ２２ ＡＮＤ Ｇ８０
： ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｐａｒｔ ｌｏｏｐ
： Ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｌｏｗ ｓｐｅｅｄ
： Ｓｔａｒｔ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
： Ｃｌｏｓｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ
： Ｓｅｃｏｎｄ ｌｏｏｐ ｓｔａｒｔ
： Ｆｅｅｄ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ
： Ｃｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ ｗｉｅｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ，５０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
： Ｌｅａｖｅ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ
： Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ
： Ｃｌｏｓｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ
： Ｃｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｔａｐｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ， ４０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
： Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ Ф３０ ｃｏｌｕｍｎ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ， ６０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
： Ｃｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｔａｐｅｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ， ４０ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
： Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅФ３０ ｃｏｌｕｍｎ
： Ｅｓｃａｐｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
： Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
： Ｅｎｄ
： Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
： Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ
： Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔｏｐ
： Ｅｎｄ
50
66
15
20
70
15
Z
３ ．１．１５ Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｘｉｓ （ Ｕ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｘ， ｉｔ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ａｎｄ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ）．
ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ ｒｅｌａｔｉｖｅ ａｎｄ ａｂｓｏｌｕｔｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ）．
ｂｅ ｐｕｔ ａｐａｒｔ ｆｉｒｓｔ， ｔｈｅｎ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｄｉｍｅｎｓｉｏｎｓ ｉｎ ｄｒａｗｉｎｇ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ，
68 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｉｎ Ｚ ａｘｉｓ （ Ｗ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ａｓ Ｚ， ｉｔ ｈａｓｎ’ｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
Ｍｏｖｅ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｆｏｒ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｂｙ Ｇ９３ ｔｏ ｐｕｔ ａｐａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌｏｗａｎｃｅ ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｉｓ ｈｏｌｄ．
Ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅｄ ａｎｄ ｔｏ ｐｕｔ ａｐａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ａｌｌｏｗａｎｃｅ， ｔｈｅ ａｌｌｏｗａｎｃｅ ｃａｎ
Page 69
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｔａｒｔ ａｇａｉｎ ｂｙ ｐｕｓｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
Ｅｎｄ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ｔｈｅ ｅｆｆｅｃｔｉｖｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｗｈｅｎ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ
Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ
ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｂｙ Ｇ９３ Ｘ０ Ｚ０， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅｎ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ．
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｏｒ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
ｉｓ ｃａｎｃｅｌｌｅｄ ｉｎ Ｘ ａｎｄ Ｚ ａｘｅｓ． Ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｇ９３， ｔｈｅ ｅｒｅｒｙ ａｌｌｏｗａｎｃｅｓ ａｒｅ ａｄｄｅｄ ｕｐ， ａｎｄ
ａｌｌ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｃａｎｃｅｌｌｅｄ ｂｙ ｒｅｓｅｔ．
3.2
ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ． Ｍ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｃｏｄｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｔｗｏ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ． Ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ
Ｍ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｉｓ ＧＳＫ９２８ＴＣ ａｒｅ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ Ｆｏｒｍａｔ Ｒ ｅｍａｒｋｓ
Functions
Ｔｈｅ Ｍ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｕｓｅｄ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔｏｐ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｍ００ Ｐａｕｓｅ ｔｏ ｗａｉｔ ｓｔａｒｔ Ｍ００
Ｍ０２
Ｍ２０
Ｍ３０
Ｍ０３ Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｄｅａｓｉｌ Ｍ０３
Ｍ０４ Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｗｉｄｄｅｒｓｈｉｎｓ Ｍ０４
Ｍ０５ Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ Ｍ０５
Ｍ０８ Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔａｒｔ Ｍ０８
Ｍ０９ Ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ ｓｔｏｐ Ｍ０９
Ｍ１０ Ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｌａｍｐ Ｍ１０
Ｍ１１ Ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｕｎｃｌａｍｐ Ｍ１１
Ｍ３２ Ｌｕｂｒｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｓｔａｒｔ Ｍ３２
Ｍ３３ Ｌｕｂｒｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｓｔｏｐ Ｍ３３
Ｍ９７ Ｐｒｇｒａｍ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ Ｍ９７ Ｐ
Ｍ９８ Ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ Ｍ９８ Ｐ Ｌ
Ｍ９９ Ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ Ｍ９９
Ｍ２１ Ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ Ｍ２１
Ｍ２２ Ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ Ｍ２２
Ｍ２３ Ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ Ｍ２３
Ｍ２４ Ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ Ｍ２４
Ｍ９１
Ｍ９２
Ｍ９３
Ｍ９４
Ｅｎｄ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｌｏｏｐ
Ｅｎｄ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ａｎｄ ｓｔｏｐ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｎｄ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
Ｗａｉｔ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ． １
Ｗａｉｔ ｆｏｒ
Ｗａｉｔ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ． ２
Ｗａｉｔ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｅｆｆｅｃｔｉｖｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｗｈｅｎ
Assistant functions
ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ
ｉｎｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ
ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ
ｉｎｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ
Ｓ
ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
Ｍ０２
Ｍ２０
Ｍ３０
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎｏ． ｔｏ ｇｏ ｂｙ Ｐ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎｏ． ｔｏ ｇｏ ｂｙ Ｐ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ
ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｉｍｅｓ ｂｙ Ｌ
Ｍ９１ Ｐ
Ｍ９２ Ｐ
Ｍ９３ Ｐ
Ｍ９４ Ｐ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎｏ． ｔｏ ｇｏ ｂｙ Ｐ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎｏ． ｔｏ ｇｏ ｂｙ Ｐ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎｏ． ｔｏ ｇｏ ｂｙ Ｐ
Ｄｅｆｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
Ｎｏ． ｔｏ ｇｏ ｂｙ Ｐ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 69
Page 70
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ｎｏｔｅ １： Ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｓ ｏｎｌｙ ｏｎｅ Ｍ ｃｏｄｅ ｉｎ ａ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｐｒｅｃｕｒｓｏｒ ｃａｎ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ ｉｆ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ Ｍ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ａｎｄ Ｇ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ａｒｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎ ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ ｉｓ ａｓ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｓ：
ｔａｋｅ ｐｒｅｃｅｄｅｎｃｅ ｏｆ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
ｔｒａｉｌ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
Ａｎｙ ｔｗｏ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｏｆ
ｏｒ Ｇ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｎｏｔｅ ３： Ｐ ｃａｎ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ ｉｎ Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ Ｍ９１ Ｍ９２ Ｍ９３ Ｍ９４．
3.2.1
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｐａｕｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｂｙ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ， ｓｏ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｔｈｉｎｇｓ ｃａｎ ｔｒｅａｔｅｄ． Ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ
ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．
Ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｓ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｈｅ ｏｎｅ’ｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｆｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ． ｉｔ
ｐａｕｓｅｓ ｉｎ ｆｒｏｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｂｙ Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｍ００． ｂｕｔ ｉｔ ｐａｕｓｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
ｗｈｅｎ ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄｈｏｌｄ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ．
3.2.2
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｗａｉｔ ｂｙ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ．
3.2.3
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ ：
Ｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ａｎｄ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ． Ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｕｓｅｄ ｆｏｒ
ｃｈｅｃｋｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ．
Pause
Program end
Machining loop end
3.2.4
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｅｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ａｎｄ ｓｔｏｐ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ， ｔｈｅｎ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｔｏ
ｗａｉｔ ｂｙ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ．
3.2.5
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｓ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｍｏｄｅ ｏｒ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｌｅｖｅｌｍｏｄｅ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ
ＭＯＤＭ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２．
ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ Ｍ０５ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ．
Ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｗｈｅｔｈｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｂｒａｋｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｎｔ ｏｕｔ ｗｈｅｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｍ０５ ｒｕｎｓ． Ｗｈｅｎ
70 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Program end, spindle and coolant stop
Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｄｅａｓｉｌ
Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｏｔａｔｅ ｗｉｄｄｅｒｓｈｉｎｓ
Ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｔｏｐ
Ｐｏｗｅｒ ｌｅｖｅｌ ｍｏｄｅ， Ｍ０５ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ．
Ｐｕｌｓｅ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｔｉｍｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｉｆｎｅ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１５， ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Spindle control
Page 71
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
P15
0.2S
ｔｈｅ ＭＤＳＰ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｂｒａｋｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｎｔ ｏｕｔ ａｔ ０．２ ｓｅｃｏｎｄ
ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｍ０５ ｅｎｄｓ． Ａｆｔｅｒ ｄｅｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ｔｉｍｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１６， ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ
ｂｒａｋｅ ｓｉｇｎｌｅ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＭＤＳＰ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ ０， ｎｏ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｂｒａｋｅ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｓｎｅｔ
ｏｕｔ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｍ０５ ｒｕｎｓ．
P16
3.2.6
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ８ ９ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ａｓ ｐｕｌｓｅ ｍｏｄｅ ｏｒ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｌｅｖｅｌ ｍｏｄｅ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ＭＯＤＭ
ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２． Ｉｎ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｌｅｖｅｌ ｍｏｄｅ， ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ Ｍ０９ ｉｓ ｏｆ ｎｏ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ．
3.2.7
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｃａｎ ｐｕｔ ｏｕｔ ｏｎｌｙ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｌｅｖｅｌ ｍｏｄｅ．
3.2.8
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
— Ｓｔａｒｔ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
—Ｓｔｏｐ ｃｏｏｌａｎｔ
— Ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｃｌａｍｐ
— Ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｕｎｃｌａｍｐ
— Ｓｔａｒｔ ｌｕｂｒｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
— Ｓｔｏｐ ｌｕｂｒｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
ｃａｎ ｐｕｔ ｏｕｔ ｏｎｌｙ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｌｅｖｅｌ ｍｏｄｅ．
Coolant control
Workpiece clamp/unclamp control
Lubrication control
3.2.9
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
Ｗｉｔｈ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｍ９７， ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｂｙ Ｐ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ．
Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｉｔ ｅｎｔｅｒｓ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｆｉｎｉｔｅ ｌｏｏｐ．
ｅ．ｇ．
Prgram transfer
Ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒｒｅｄ ｔｏ． Ｉｔ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ａ ｆｏｕｒ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ．
GSK CNC Equipment Company 71
Page 72
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ Ｎ００４０ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ Ｎ００７０ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ Ｎ００５０
ｏｒ Ｎ００６０．
3.2.10
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒｅｄ ｏｎｃｅ． Ｓｃａｌｅ： １￣９９．
Ｉｆ ｓｏｍｅ ｓｅｑｕｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔｓ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ａｐｐｅａｒｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ， ｔｈｅｙ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｔｒｅａｔｅｄ ａｓ
ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ．Ｔｈｅｙ ｃａｎｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｗｒｉｔｔｅｎ ｏｎｃｅ ａｇａｉｎ ｊｕｓｔ ｂｙ Ｍ９８， Ｍ９９．
ｅ．ｇ．
Ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ
Ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ
Ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
Ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｒｅｔｕｒｎ
Ｒｕｎ ｆｒｏｍ ｔｏ
Ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ａｆｔｅｒ
Ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｆｒｏｍ
ｒｅｔｕｒｎ ｔｏ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ
Ｔｈｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ． Ｉｔ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ４ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ
Ｌ
Ｔｈｅ ｔｉｍｅｓ ｏｆ ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ． Ｌ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ ｏｒ ｉｓ ０ ｏｒ １， ｔｈｅ ｓｕｂｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｉｓ
Ｎ０１００
Subprogram transfer and return
Ｐ Ｌ
ａｎｄ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ
ａｆｔｅｒ ．
ｔｏ
Ｎ０１４０
ｔｏ ｅｎｄ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ．
ｔｈｒｅｅ ｔｉｍｅｓ ａｆｔｅｒ ｒｕｎ ． Ｔｈｅｎ
3.2.1 1
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｗｏ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔｓ， ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｍｏｄｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｅｄ
ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ａｎｙ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｎｄｅｐｅｎｄｅｎｔｌｙ， ａｎｄ ｔｈａｒｅ
ｈａｓ ｎ’ｔ ａｎｙ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
72 GSK CNC Equipment Company
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ａｌｌｏｄｉａｌｌｙ ｂｙ ｕｓｅｒ． Ｔｈｅｙ
Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｖａｌｉｄ （Ｌｏｗ ｌｅｖｅｌｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ （ｓｔｏｐ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ）
Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｖａｌｉｄ Ｌｏｗ ｌｅｖｅｌｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ （ｓｔｏｐ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ）
User output control
Page 73
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
3.2.12
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｓｕｉｔａｂｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｍｅｎｔ ｏｆ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｗｈｅｎ Ｐ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ， ｔｈｅ
ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｒｕｎ ｏｒｄｅｒｌｙ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｉｔ ｗａｉｔｓ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ． Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ
ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｉｓ ｓｕｉｔａｂｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｍｅｎｔ ｏｆ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｗｈｅｎ ，ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｔｅｄ ｂｙ Ｐ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｉｔ ｗａｉｔｓ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ．
Ｗｈｅｎ Ｐ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ：
ｔｏ ０Ｖ） ｕｐ ｔｏ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇｎａｌ
ｄｉｓｃｏｎｎｅｃｅｃｔｅｄ ｔｏ ０Ｖ） ｕｐ ｔｏ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇｎａｌ
ｔｏ ０Ｖ） ｕｐ ｔｏ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇ ｎａｌ
ｄｉｓｃｏｎｎｅｃｅｃｔｅｄ ｔｏ ０Ｖ） ｕｐ ｔｏ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｖａｌｉｄ ｓｉｇｎａｌ
Ｗｈｅｎ ：
ｔｏ ０Ｖ）， ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｂｙ Ｐ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
ｄｉｓｃｏｎｎｅｃｅｃｔｅｄ ｔｏ ０Ｖ）， ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｂｙ Ｐ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
ｔｏ ０Ｖ）， ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｂｙ Ｐ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
ｄｉｓｃｏｎｎｅｃｅｃｔｅｄ ｔｏ ０Ｖ）， ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｂｙ Ｐ， ｏｔｈｅｒｗｉｓｅ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
ｈａｓ ｎ’ｔ ａｎｙ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
Ｔｈｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ ｏｆ ｏｂｊｅｃｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． Ｗｈｅｎ Ｐ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔｓ， ｔｈｅｒｅ ｉｓ ｎｏ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ． Ｐ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ
４ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ．
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．１ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
ｃｈｅｃｋｓ ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｏｆ Ｎｏ．２ ｕｓｅｒ ｉｎｐｕｔ， Ｉｆ ｉｔ ｋｅｅｐｓ ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ （ｉｎｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔ
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ａｎｙ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ９ ９ ９ ９ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｎｄｅｐｅｎｄｅｎｔｌｙ， ａｎｄ ｔｈａｒｅ
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ａｌｌｏｄｉａｌｌｙ ｂｙ ｕｓｅｒ．
ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｗｏ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｐｏｉｎｔｓ． Ｉｆ
User input control
3.3 Fuctions
Ｉｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｅｓ ｏｆ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ Ｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｄａｔａ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ．
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｉｓ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｂｙ ＭＯＤＳ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ａｓｓｅｍｂｌｉｅｄ ｍｏｔｏｒ
ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ．
Spindle functions
GSK CNC Equipment Company 73
Page 74
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
3.3.1 Mu ltilevel spindle motor control
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＭＯＤＳ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ， ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｌｅｖｅｌ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｍｏｔｏｒ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｄ．
Ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ４ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｏｒ １６ ｓｔｅｐｓ ＢＣＤ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ
ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ Ｓ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ，
ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｔｏ ｗａｉｔ ａ ｍｏｍｅｎｔ ｆｏｒ ｌｅｖｅｌｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｏｆｆ， ｓｏ ｔｈｅ Ｇ０４ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ａｄｄｅｄ
ｔｏ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｗｅｌｌ ａｎｄ ｔｒｕｌｙ ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｌｅｖｅｌｅｄ ｏｆｆ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＣＨＣＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ
ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ ０， ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ．
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｍｏｄｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍｕｌｔｉｌｅｖｅｌ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ＳＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１． Ｗｈｅｎ
ＳＣＯＤ＝０， ｉｔ ｉｓ ４ ｓｔｅｐｓ ｄｉｒｅｃｔ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｆｒｏｍ Ｓ０ ｔｏ Ｓ４， ｏｎｅ ｓｔｅｐ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｓ ｔｏ ｏｎｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
ｐｏｉｎｔ； Ｗｈｅｎ ＳＣＯＤ＝１， ｉｔ ｉｓ １６ ｓｔｅｐｓ ＢＣＤ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｆｒｏｍ Ｓ０￣Ｓ１５．
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ｏｒ
ＢＣＤ ｃｏｄｉｎｇ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｌｉｓｔ：
ｃｏｄｅ
ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
Ｓ１
Ｓ２
Ｓ３
Ｓ４
Ｓ００ Ｓ０１ Ｓ０２ Ｓ０３ Ｓ０４ Ｓ０５ Ｓ０６ Ｓ０７ Ｓ０８ Ｓ０９ Ｓ１０ Ｓ１１ Ｓ１２ Ｓ１３ Ｓ１４ Ｓ１５
S0~S4 SCOD=0
S0~S15 SCOD=1
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔｓ ｗｉｔｈ ａｒｅ ｖａｌｉｄ．
3.3.2 Frequency conversion motor control
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ＭＯＤＳ ｂｉｔ ｏｓ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１２ ｉｓ １， ｔｈｅ ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ ｍｏｔｏｒ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｄ
ｂｙ Ｓ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ． Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｔｈｅ ０￣１０ Ｖ ＤＣ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｎｓｄｕｃｅｒ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｍｏｔｏｒ．
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ： Ｓ
Ｉｔ ｃｏｎｓｉｓｔｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ Ｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｄａｔａ （ｓｐｅｅｄ）．Ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ １０Ｖ ｄｃ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０９／Ｐ１０ ａｎｄ ｉｎｐｕｔ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ＳＨＬ． Ｗｈｅｎ ＳＨＬ＝０ （ｌｏｗ
ｓｐｅｅｄ ｓｔｅｐ）， ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ １０Ｖ ＤＣ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ｂｙ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ０９； Ｗｈｅｎ ＳＨＬ＝１
（ｈｉｇｈ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｓｔｅｐ）， ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ １０Ｖ ＤＣ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ｂｙ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１０． Ｗｈｅｎ
ｉｔ ｉｓ ｏｎｅ ｓｔｅｐ， ｔｈｅ ｍａｘ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ １０Ｖ ＤＣ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｉｓ ｓｅｔ ｂｙ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１０．
3.4 Function
Usually, several different tools are necessary in machining one workpiece. The 4~8 position toolpost can be
controlled (the direct signal iuput is for 1~4 tools, the sign coding input is for 5~8 tools). For avoid the different
positions and wears of the tools, the tool compensation can be adopted.
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ：
ａ—Ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ， ｓｃａｌｅ： ０￣４． Ｉｆ ａ＝０， ｉｔ ｊｕｓｔ ｒｕｎｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ．
Ｉｔ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ （ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ １￣６ ｏｒ １￣８ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ６ ｏｒ ８ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ）．
ｂ
—Ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ， ｓｃａｌｅ：１￣９． Ｔｈｅｙ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ９ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎｓ
ｄａｔａ ｒｅｓｐｅｃｔｉｖｅｌｙ．
Ｔｈｅ ｍｏｓｔ ８ ｔｏｏｌｓ ａｎｄ ９ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ． Ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
ｓｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｕｓｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｍｅａｎ ｔｉｍｅ ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ
Tool function
Ｔ１１， Ｔ２２， Ｔ３３，… Ｔ８８
ｔｏ
74 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 75
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｅｎｓｕｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ， ｅｘｃｅｐｔ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｒ ａ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ．
Ｉｎ ｐｏｉｎｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ
ｇｒｏｕｐｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ａｒｅ ｎｏｔ ｍｏｒｅ ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ． Ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｖｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ
ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎｐｕｔｅｄ ｍａｎｕａｌｌｙ （ｉｔ ｈａｓ ｎｏｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｒｒｅｓｐｏｎｄｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）． Ｉｎ ｔｒｉａｌ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ
ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｃｏｍｏｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｉｍｐｕｔｅｄ ｍａｎｕａｌｌｙ， ｓｏ ｉｔ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｌｉｍｉｔｅｄ．
Ｉｆ ｂ＝０ ｉｎ Ｔ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｉｓ ｃａｎｃｅｌｌｅｄ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ａｐｐｌｙｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅｍ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｃａｎｃｅｌｌｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｒｅｔｕｒｎｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
ｐｏｉｎｔ ｏｒ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ Ｇ２６， Ｇ２７， Ｇ２９ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｉｎｅｕｐ ｔｏｏｌ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｕｓｅ， ｔｈｅ ＴＣＯＤ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｐｕｓｈ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ
ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｔｏ ｒｅｓｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｗ ｔｏｏｌ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ／ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｓｉｇｎａｌ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ， ｔｈｅｎ
ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｒｅａｔｅｄ ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃａｌｌｙ ｂｙ ｔｒｉａｌ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ｏｒ ｐｏｉｎｔｉｎｇ ｔｏｏｌ
ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ．
3.4.1 Tool offset mode
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＰＴＳＲ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ ｚｅｒｏ， ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｍｏｖｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
ｓｌｉｄｅｒ．
l Ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ， ｒｕｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｂ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ
ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ．ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｏｅｓｎ’ｔ ｃｈａｎｇｅ．
l ＩＦ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ． ａ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅｎ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｂ， ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｍｏｖｅｓ
ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ ｓｐｅｅｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ．ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｄｏｅｓｎ’ｔ ｃｈａｎｇｅ． Ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ ｍｏｖｅｓ ｉｎ Ｘ， Ｚ ａｘｅｓ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｉｍｅ．
l Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ａ
ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｏｎ， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｂ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ
Ｘ，Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｉｍｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｉｏｎ． Ｉｎ Ｇ００， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｍｏｖｅ
ｓｐｅｅｄ． Ｉｎ Ｇ０１， ｉｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ．
Ｗｈｅｎ ｏｎｌｙ ｏｎｅ ａｘｉｓ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｉｎ Ｇ００ ｏｒ Ｇ０１， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ａｘｉｓ ｗｉｌｌ
ｂｅ ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｅｄ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｉｍｅ． Ｓｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｅｄ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ
ｗｉｔｈ Ｇ００ ｏｒ Ｇ０１ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｔｏ ｉｍｐｒｏｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ． Ｅ．ｇ．
Ｔ ａ ｂ
Ｔ ａ ｂ
The slider move
Ｔ ａ ｂ
ｉｓ ａ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｒｕｎ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ｉｓ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｉｔｈ Ｇ００ ｏｒ Ｇ０１ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．
， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．ａ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅｎ
Ｔ ａ ｂ
Ｇ０ Ｘ１００ Ｚ３０ Ｔ２２
．
， ｓｗｉｔｃｈ
3.4.2 Tool offset mode
Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ＰＴＳＲ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｐ１１ ｉｓ １， ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｒｅｄｅｆｉｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ．
l Ｗｈｅｎ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ （ａ＝０， ｎｏ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ）， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｂ ｉｓ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ
ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｉｓ ｉｍｍｏｂｉｌｅ．
l Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｔ ａ ｂ ｉｓ ａ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ， ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．ａ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ （ａ＝０， ｎｏ ｔｏｏｌｃｈａｎｇｅ）， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｂ ｉｓ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ａｎｄ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙｅｄ， ｂｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｉｓ
ｉｍｍｏｂｉｌｅ．
l Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ
ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ． ａ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｐｏｓｉｔｏｎ， ｔｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ ｂ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｅｄ
ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ Ｘ，Ｚ ａｘｉｓ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｔｉｍｅ ａｆｔｅｒ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｉｏｎ．
Ｎｏｔｅ： Ｗｉｔｈ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｉｄｅｒ ｍｏｖｅ ａｎｄ ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｓ ｒｅｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎ， ｔｈｅ ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ Ｇ０１／Ｇ００ ｉｎ
Ｔ ａ ｂ
The coordinates r edefination
Ｔ ａ ｂ
ｉｓ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｉｔｈ Ｇ００ ｏｒ Ｇ０１ ｉｎ ＡＵＴＯ ｍｏｄｅ，ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ
ｉｎ ＪＯＧ ｍｏｄｅ， ｆｉｒｓｔ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｔｈｅ Ｎｏ．ａ ｔｏｏｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ
Ｔ ａ ｂ
， ｆｉｒｓｔ
GSK CNC Equipment Company 75
Page 76
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｅｄ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍａｎｃｅ． Ａｎｙ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ｃｕｍｕｌａｔｅｄ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ
ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ．
3.5 F function
Ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ： Ｆ ＊＊＊＊
Ｔｈｉｓ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ ｓｉｇｎ Ｆ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ４ ｂｉｔｓ ｉｎｔｅｇｅｒ．
Ｓｃａｌｅ： ０￣９９９９ Ｕｎｉｔ： ｍｍ／ｍｉｎ
Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｉｎ ｍｏｄｕｌａｒ． Ｉｔ ｄｏｅｓｎ’ｔ ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ｒｅｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎ． Ｔｈｅ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｓ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｂｙ
ｔｈｅ ｓｅｔ ｓｐｅｅｄ Ｆ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
Ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｉｓｎ’ｔ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｓｙｓｔｅｍ， ｔｈｅ ｆｅｅｄ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｃａｎ ｂｅ
ｏｂｔａｉｎｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｆｏｒｍｕｌａ
ｏｒ ｆｅｅｄ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｍｉｎ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ （ｒｐｍ）
Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ａｃｔｕａｌ ｆｅｅｄ ｓｐｅｅｄ
Ｆ ＝ Ｆｅｅｄ ｐｅｒ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ／ ｒｏｔａｔｉｏｎ ｓｐｉｎｄｌｅ ｒｅｖ ｒｐｍ
Feed speed function
：
＝
ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ
IV Common Programming Rules
4.1 Some dictates in one segment
Only the following dictates can be in one segment at the same time.
４．１．１
Ｏｎｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ Ｇ０４ （ｄｅｌａｙ） ｃａｎ ｂｅ ａｐｐｅａｒｅｄ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｗｉｔｈ ｏｔｈｅｒ Ｇ ｃｏｄｅ． Ｔｈｅ ａｎｙ
ｏｔｈｅｒ ｔｗｏ Ｇ ｃｏｄｅｓ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｂｅ ａｐｐｅａｒｅｄ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
４．１．２
Ｔｈｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ ｏｆ ｓｏｍｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ （ｉｆ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ）：
１
Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ
２
Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ Ｔ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
３
Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ
４
Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｌａｙ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
５
Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ Ｇ
６
Ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ
７
Ｔｈｅｎ ｒｕｎ ｔｈｅ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ
４．１．３
Ｉｆ ｔｈａｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｃｏｍｐａｔｉｂｌｅ ａｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｒ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ
ｄａｔａ， ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｅｄ． Ｔｏ ａｖｏｉｄ ｉｔ， ｔｈｅ ｉｎｃｏｍｐａｔｉｂｌｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｃａｂ ｂｅ ｄｉｖｉｄｅｄ
ｉｎｔｏ ｇｒｏｕｐｓ， ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓａｍｅ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ ｏｎｃｅ． Ｏｎｌｙ ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
ｉｎ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｇｒｏｕｐｓ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ． Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
１ ｇｒｏｕｐ： Ｔｈｅ Ｇ ｃｏｄｅｓ ｅｘｃｅｐｔ
２ ｇｒｏｕｐ：
３ ｇｒｏｕｐ：
４ ｇｒｏｕｐ：
５ ｇｒｏｕｐ：
６ ｇｒｏｕｐ：
７ ｇｒｏｕｐ：
76 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Ｓ， Ｆ
ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ｆｉｒｓｔ
ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｉｎ ａ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
an so on.
Page 77
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
ol No. 2 tool No. 3 tool No. 4 tool
38
105
Ф
64
5
Z
4.2 The modular state and the initial state of the dictate
The dictates in modular can be keeping in effect in the following segments until redefinition. It can
simplify the repeated segments in onethe program, save the storage, improve the efficiency.
Ｔｈｅ ｍｏｄｕｌａｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ：
ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
＊ Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｅｄ ｗｈｅｎ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｏｎ．
Ｔｈｅ ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ：
＊ ｔｈｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ
Ｔｈｅｓｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ｍｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ． Ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
4.3 The other rules
＊ Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｃｔａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ｕｎａｌｌｏｗｅｄ ｒｅｐｅａｔ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
＊ Ｔｈｅ ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｄ ｄａｔａ ｃａｎ’ｔ ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ．
＊ Ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｌｙｉｎｇ ｄａｔａ ｃａｎ’ｔ ａｐｐｅａｒ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ
ｓｅｇｍｅｎｔ．
＊ Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｂｉｔ ｏｆ ｄａｔａ ｉｓ ０， ｉｔ ｃａｎ
ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ．
：
ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｏｎ．
No. 1 to
PITCURE 31 TOOL SHAPE OF PROGRAMMING INSTANCE
3
4.4 Programming instance
Ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌｓ ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ３１ ａｒｅ ａｄｏｐｔｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ．
4.4.1 Outer cylinder machining
Ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ １
Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ３２． Ｒｏｄ： ６４ １０５ ｍｍ． Ｎｏ．１ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
Ｎｏ．２ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ． Ｔｈｅ ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅｓ ｆｏｒｍ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｐｏｉｎｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｏｄ ｅｎｄｆａｃｅ
ａｎｄ ｏｕｔｅｒ ｃｏｌｕｍｎ ａｒｅ ５ｍｍ．
35
Ф60
30
Ф３0
Ф45
1.5*45
X
PICTURE 32 INSTANCE 1
Define the start point
GSK CNC Equipment Company 77
Page 78
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
.
2
.
X52.5
X48.5
X45.5
G0 X45.5
X35.5
X30.5
.
.
Start the spindle with the No.1 grade
speed
Start coolant
T ransfer No.1 tool with No.1
compensation
No. 1 tool closes to the workpiece
Cut the endface with the speed
60mm/min
No. 1 tool leaves the endface
Position tool, and keep 0.5mm
allowance
Cut the outer column Ö60.5
The tool leaves the workpiece
Position the tool near the workpiece
Cut the outer column Ö45mm with
the outer cylinder machining loop
Feed 4mm, repeat again
Feed 4mm, repeat again
Feed 3mm, repeat again
Cut the outer column Ö30mm with
the outer cylinder machining loop
Feed 5mm, repeat again
Feed 5mm, re peat again
Tool escapes to the safe position
Transfer No.2 tool
Spindle No.2 speed
T he tool closes to the workpiece
T he tool moves to the start points of
obtuse
Finish machine the obtuse 1.5mm
Finish machine the outr cylinder
Ö30mm
Finish machine the outr cylinder
Ö40mm
Finish machine the outr cylinder
Ö60mm
T he tool return to the start point
Stop spindle
Stop coolant
E nd
78 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 79
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Z
10
４．４．２ Ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ
Ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ ２：
Ｍａｃｈｉｎｅ ｔｈｅ ｗｏｒｋｐｉｅｃｅ ｉｎ ＰＩＣＴＵＲＥ ３２． Ｒｏｄ： ６４ １０５ ｍｍ， Ｎｏ．１ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ，
Ｎｏ．４ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ６０ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， Ｎｏ．３ ｆｏｒ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｏｆｆ
25
24
X
PICTURE 33 THREAD MACHINING INSTANCE
6
; Positon the start point of the first
50
76
P
28
M16*1.5
10
Define the start point
Start spindle with No.2 grade speed
Start coolant
Transfer No.1 with No.1 compensation
T he tool closes to the workpiece
Cut endface with speed 60mm/min
T he tool leaves the workpiece
T he tool closes to workpiece
Cut the outer cylinder 24, keep the
tool width
T he tool leaves the workpiece
T he tool closes to the workpiece
Cut the outer cylinder 16 with
column machining loop
Feed 3mm, repeat again
Feed 2.1mm.repeat again (smaller
0.1mm then outer cylinder)
; T he tool moves to obtuse
; Obtuse
T he tool escapes to safe position
; T ransfer No.4 tool with No.4
compensation
; No. 2 grade spindle speed
thread machining
M achine the thread. Toolexit trail
length 2mm
Feed 0.8mm, second machining thread
Feed 0.4mm, third machining thread
GSK CNC Equipment Company 79
Page 80
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
20
40
10
150
Z
Feed 0.2mm, fourth machining thread
T he tool escapes to the safe position
Transfer the No. 3 tool
T he tool closea to the cutting point
cut
Return to the start point of machining
in X,Z axes
Stop coolant
Stop spindle
E nd
4.4.3 Compund machining instance
Instance 3: Machine the workpiece in PICTURE 34. Rod: １３５ １７８ ｍｍ， Ｎｏ．１ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ
ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｅｒ ｃｙｌｉｎｄｅｒ， Ｎｏ．２ ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｅｒ ｃｙｌｉｎｄｅｒ，Ｎｏ．３ ｆｏｒ ｃｕｔｔｉｎｇ ｏｆｆ， Ｎｏ．４
ｔｏｏｌ ｆｏｒ ６０ ｔｈｒｅａｄ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ， ｔｈｅ ａｌｌｏｗａｎｃｅ ａｔ ｒｏｕｇｈ ｍａｃｈｉｎｉｎｇ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｓｅｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｏｏｌ ｏｆｆｓｅｔ
ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｔ９．
25
5
130
120
40 30
R20
R20
Rod outline
30
3
2-1.5*45’
185
PICTURE 34 COMPOUND MACHINING INSTANCE
1
R 2 0
R 2 0
30 3
Reference point
20
1*45’
16
135
Define the start po int
Start the spindle with
No.1grade speed
Start coolant
Compensate and keep the
allowence
T he tool closes to the
workpiece
Outer cylinder compound loop
T he tool closes to the endface
Cut the endface
Cut the outer cylinder 16
Cut the endface
Cut the outer cylinder 40
Cut the convex arc
Cut the concave arc
Cut the outer cylinder 120
80 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 81
Programming GSK928TC Turning CNC System
P
Cut the taper
Cut the outer cylinder 130
Finish the rough machining,
return to the start point
Cancel the tool compensation
and the allowence
Transfer No.2 tool to finish
machine outer cylinder.
Spindle high speed
Close to workpiece
Cut 16 endface
Return
Chamfer 1 45
Finish machine outer cylinder
16
Finish machine endface 40
Chamfer 1 45
Finish machine outer cylinder
40
Finish machine convex arc
Finish machine concave arc
Cut outer cylinder 120
Finish machine taper
Finish machine outer cylinder
130
Return start point
Transfer No.3 tool to slot
Close to workpiece
Cut slot 30
Return
Chamfer
E scape for tool width
Cut slot 10
Return
Return start point
Transfer No.4 tool to cut
thread with low spindle speed
Close to workpiece
T hread machining loop
Feed 0.8mm, second machining
Feed 0.5mm, third machining
Return start point
Transfer No.1 tool
Stop spindle
Stop coolant
E nd
GSK CNC Equipment Company 81
Page 82
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Connection
I. Interface summary
1. Interface layout
GND
VCC
AC220V
AC220V
pin
131211109
2524232221
87654321
20191817161514
X6 Input
GND
0V
＋
24V
AC220V
SWITCH POWER
AC220V
slot
12345678
14151617181920
12
3
4
X7 Output
2425 23 22 21
X8 power
input terminal
power filter
dutput terminal
AC220V
FN2060-6-06
AC220V
pin
67
5
pin
54321
9876
slot
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
X2 Handwheel
Ｘ１ ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
13 12 11 10 9
pin
5
4
8 9
3
7
2
6
X3 Thread
1
pin
X4 Toolpost
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
slot
12345678
9101112131415
X5 motor
doesn't puts through, this system prompts Emergency.
It should be connected to 0V pin as a rule.
!CAUTION: No. 15 pin of X6 is used for the external emergency stop button. When it
Assemtly hole*4
82 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 83
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
GSK928T
2. Sockets instruction
1. X8 core aerial slot, power socket (VCC GND +24V 0V)
2. X1 RS232 interface, DB9 pins
3. X2 handwheel interface, DB9 slots
4. X3 thread interface, DB9 pins
5. X4 toolpost interface, DB15 pins
6. X5 driver interface, DB15slots
7. X6 input interface, DB25 pins
8. X7 output interface, DB25 slots
9. GND
3 Inset sketch map
X driver Z driver
X5
X2
Handwheel
X3
Encoder
X4 X6
Toolpost
C
Input signal
Convertor
X7
Output signal PC
X1
X8
PC power
GSK CNC Equipment Company 83
Page 84
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
4 Interface tables
RTS
CTS
X2 handwheel
+5V
handwheel A pulse (MUA)
X3 thread
Thread head pulse (PZ)
0V
Toolpost Negative Signal (TL-)
0V
No.2 Tool (T2)
No.4 Tool (T4)
Z axis zero point (Z0)
X1 RS232
pin
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
slot
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
pin
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
X4 Toolpost
pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Data Receive(RXD)
Data Send(TXD)
GND
0V
hardwheel B pulse (MUB)
thread pulse (PA)
0V
+5V
Toolpost Postive Signal(TL+)
+24V
No.1 Tool (T1)
No.3 Tool (T3)
X axis zero point (X0)
loop start(ST)
Emergency stap(ESP)
0V
X axis return to zero (Decx)
+24
+24
0V
X/Z axis postive limit (+XZL)
X/Z axis postive limit (+XZL)
No.1 User input (M91/M92)
Spindle/feedhold signal (M3XZ2)
0V
+24
+24
Spindle speed 1(S01)
Spindle speed 2(S02)
Spindle speed 3(S03)
Spindle speed 4(S04)
Spindle brake(MSP)
Coolant On(M8)
Spindle backward(M4)
X6 Input
pin
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25
X7 Output
+24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pause(SP)
0V
The feedback signal H/L of convertible spindle (SHL)
Z axis return to zero
+24
0V
0V
X/Z axis negative limit (-XZL)
9 10 11 12 13
X/Z axis negative limit (-XZL)
No.2 User input (M93/M94)
Feedhold signal (M3XZ1)
0V
slot
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
+24
0V
Coolant switch (M32/M33)
unlock (M10/M11)
coolant off (M9)
Spindle stop (M5)
21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12
Spindle forward(M3)
Frequenay convertor 0V
control voltage (SVC)
25
13
X5 motor
X axis driver alarm (Xalm)
+24V
X axis pulse negative (Xpu-)
Z axis pulse negative (Zpu-)
X axis direction postive (Xdir+)
Z axis direction postive (Zdir+)
X axis enable (Xen)
+5V
slot
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Z axis driver alarm (Zalm)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0V
X axis pulse postive (Xpu+)
Z axis pulse postive (Zpu+)
X axis direction negative (Xdir-)
Z axis direction negative (Zdir-)
Z axis enable (Zen)
X8 power
pin
VCCVCC
12
4
3
＋
24V
5
67
GND
＋
24V
GND0V
84 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 85
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
+
. Interface instruction
1 Handwheel interface
1. Select the handwheel to move the X, Z axis.
1 +5V
2 MUA
3
4
5
2. Signal:
MUA Handwheel A pulse
MUB Handwheel B pulse
3. Interface illustrative diagram
4. Connection
Handwheel
+5V
0V
A
B
6 0V
7 MUB
8
_
+5V
220
GSK 928TC
1(+5V)
6(0V)
2(MUA)
7(MUB)
Handwheel GSK928TC
GSK CNC Equipment Company 85
Page 86
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
+
2. Thread interface
1 PA
2 0V
3 +5V
4
5
1. When cut the thread, the spindle encoder is necessary. Both 1200 lines and 1024 lines
encoder are suitable for this system.
2. Signal:
PA: encoder A pulse (thread pulse), 1200 pulse/rotation or 1024 pulse/rotation
PZ: encoder Z pulse (thread lines signal), 1pulse/rotation
3. Interface illustrative diagram
4. Connection
+5V
0V
A
Z
6 PZ
7 0V
8
9
_
Ecoder
+5V
220
GSK928TC
3(+5V)
2(0V)
1(PA)
6(PZ)
Encoder GSK928TC
86 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 87
RXD 2
TXD 3
5
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
3 RS232 interface
1
2 RXD
3 TXD
4
5 GND
This system can communicate with PC.
RXD Data receive
TXD Data send
RTS Standby
CTS Standby
GDN
6
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
3 TXD
2 RXD
5 GDN
PC GSK928TC
4 Driver interface
1 Xalm
2 +24V
3 Xpu4 Zpu5 Xdir+
6 Zdir+
7 Xen
8 +5V
1. The response step driver, the compound step driver and the servo driver are suitable for this
system by this interface.
Xalm X axis driver alarm input terminal , Signal from driver to GSK928TC
Xpu+ X axis driver pulse positive terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Xpu - X axis driver pulse negative terminal, signal from GSK928TC to driver
Xdir+ X axis driver direction positive terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Xdir- X axis driver direction negative terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Xen X axis enable (amplifier), signal from GSK928TC to driver
Zalm Z axis driver alarm input terminal , Signal from driver to GSK928TC
Zpu+ Z axis driver pulse positive terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Zpu- Z axis driver pulse negative terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Zdir+ Z axis driver direction positive terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Zdir- Z axis driver direction negative terminal , signal from GSK928TC to driver
Zen Z axis enable (amplifier), signal from GSK928TC to driver
9 Zalm
10 0V
11 Xpu+
12 Zpu+
13 Xdir14 Zdir15 Zen
GSK CNC Equipment Company 87
Page 88
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
+5V
2. Xalm Zalm Interface illustrative diagram
+24
3.1k
Driver
TLP5
0V
GSK928TC
3. Xen Zen Interface illustrative diagram
4. Xpu+ Xpu- Xdir+ Xdir-;Zpu+ Zpu- Zdir+ Zdir- Interface illustrative diagram
88 GSK CNC Equipment Company
TLP5
GSK928TC
26LS3
GSK928TC
0V
Driver
300
Driver
Page 89
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
5. The connection between GSK928TC and Drivers (Hardware version V2.0)
Conection between GSK928TC and DY3 Driver
GSK928TC(X axis) DY3 drivers
11 Xpu+
3 Xpu5 Xdir+
13 Xdir8 +5V
7 Xen
1 Xalm
10 OV
shell
Conection between GSK928TC and DA98 driver
GSK928TC(X axis ) DA98 dirver
11 Xpu+
3 Xpu5 Xdir+
13 Xdir7 Xen
2 +24V
1 Xalm
10 OV
shell
21 X0 19 Z0
928TC Input socket
X axis pulse+
X axis pulse X axis direction +
X axis direction +5V
X axis enable
X axis alarm
X axis pulse +
X axis pulse X axis direction +
X axis direction X axis enable
＋
24V
X axis alarm
conection signal
1 CP+
9 CP2 Dir+
10 Dir3 Dv+
11 Dv6 Alm
14 COM
shell shell
18 PULS
6 /PULS
19 SIGN
7 /SIGN
21 SON
8 COM+
1 ALM
3 COM
5 COM
10 RSTP
4 DG
17 DG
22 FSTP
shell
GSK928TC(Z axis) DY3 drivers
12
4
6
14
8
15
9
10
GSK928TC(Z axis ) DA98 driver
928TC Input socket
ZPU+
ZPUZdir+
Zdir+5V
Zen
Zalm
OV
shell
12 ZPU+
4 ZPU6 Zdir+
14 Zdir15 Zen
2 +24V
9 Zalm
10 OV
shell
Z axis pulse +
Z axis pulse Z axis direction+
Z axis direction +5V
Z axis enable
Z axis alarm
Z axis pulse +
Z axis pulse Z axis direction +
Z axis direction
Z axis enable
＋
24V
Z axis alarm
conection signal
1
CP+
9
CP-
2
Dir+
10
Dir-
3
DV+
11
DV-
6
Alm
14
COM
18 PULS
6 /PULS
19 SIGN
7 /SIGN
21 SON
8 COM
1 ALM
3 COM
5 COM
2 Zero2 Zero
10 RSTP
4 DG
17 DG
22 FSTP
shell
＋
Conection between GSK928TC and DF3 driver
GSK928TC(X axis )
X5:
11 Xpu+
3 Xpu5 Xdir+
13 Xdir8 ＋5V
7 Xen
1 Xalm
10 OV
shell
X axis pulse +
X axis pulse X axis direction +
X axis direction -
＋
X axis enable
X axis alarm
5V
DF3 direction
conection signal
1 CP
2 /CP
3 DIR
4 /DIR
8 FRE
5 /FRE
7 ALM
9 COM
shell
GSK928TC(Z axis ) DF3 direction
conection Signal
1 CP
2 /CP
3 DIR
4 /DIR
8 FRE
5 /FRE
7 Alm
9 COM
shell
12 Zpu+
4 Zpu6 Zdir+
14 Zdir8 ＋5V
15 Zen
9 Zalm
10 OV
shell
Z axis pulse +
Z axis pulse Z axis direction +
Z axis direction -
＋
5V
Z axis enable
Z axis alarm
GSK CNC Equipment Company 89
Page 90
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
+2
V
5. Toolpost interface
1 TL+
2 +24V
3 T1
4 T3
5
6
7
8
9 TL10 0V
11 T2
12 T4
13
14
15
1. This system can control 4~8 position toolpost. If there has more then 4 positions on the
toolpost, the T1~T4 coding input is adopted in this system ( refer to the GSK TC toolpost
controller illustrative diagram).
TL+ Drive toolpost forward, signal from GSK928TC to toolpost.
TL- Drive toolpost backward, signal from GSK928TC to toolpost.
T1 No.1 tool arrived. Signal from toolpost to GSK928TC
T2 No.2 tool arrived. Signal from toolpost to GSK928TC
T3 No.3 tool arrived. Signal from toolpost to GSK928TC
T4 No.4 tool arrived. Signal from toolpost to GSK928TC
2. TL+ TL- illustrative diagram
ULN2803
0V
GSK928TC
Toolpost
3. T1 T2 T3 T4 illustrative diagram
4.7K
Toolpost
VT
0
Relay
+24
3K
GSK928TC
90 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 91
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
Remarks: the valid level, VT (from toolpost to GSK928TC when the tool arrived) is determined by the bit parameter
P12.
4. Connection example:
+24V
0V
TL+
TL-
T1
T2
T3
T4
2
10
1
9
3
11
4
12
4
11
10
12
13
1
2
3
+24V
0V
JZ
JF
T1
T2
T3
T4
GSK TC
Toolpost
Controller
GSK928TC
Toolpost
6 Input interface
1 +24
2 SP
3 0V
4 SHL
5 DecZ
6 +24
7 0V
8 0V
9 Z0
10 -XZL
11 M93/M94
12 M3XZ2
13 0V
1. Signal definition:
All the input signal are valid with low level, signal from toolpost to GSK928TC.
SP External pause button signal
ST External loop start button signal.
ESP External emergency button signal.
SHL Frequency convertor spindle low speed feedback signal. To avoid the weakness of the
defective torque in low speed, keep the motor running with high speed by changing the
mechanical drive ratio, then the signal is feeded back to GSK928TC by SHL.
DecX the signal of X axis speed down and return to point.
DecZ the signal of Z axis speed down and return to point.
-XZL X Z axis negative limit signal.
+XZL X Z axis negative limit signal.
X0 X axis point input signal.
Z0 Z axis point input signal.
14 ST
15 ESP
16 0V
17 DecX
18 +24
19 +24
20 0V
21 X0
22 +XZL
23 M91/M92
24 M3XZ1
25 0V
GSK CNC Equipment Company 91
Page 92
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
The valid signal puts through
M3XZ1 Feedhold signal. When this signal is valid (the switch contact puts through), the feeds
in X, Z axis are locked (pause in X, Z axis).
M3XZ2 Spindle/feedhold signal. When this signal is valid (the switch contact puts through),the
feeds in X, Z axis and the spindle are locked (pause in X, z axis, and the spindle stops)
Note: When M3XZ2 is valid, the M3XZ1 is insignificant.
M91/M92 No. 1 user input signal
M93/M94 No. 2 user input signal
2. Interface elements
SP ST signals adopt the normal open contact of the mechanical contact switch. ESP
signal adopts the normal close contact of the mechanical contact switch.
Connection illustrative diagram:
+24
2K
Machine
0
GSK928TC
Connection example:
Switch with lock
Switch without lock
3
0V
1
ST
2
SP
15
ESP
GSK928TC
DecX DecZ -XZL +XZL X0 Z0 M91 M93 SHL M3XZ1 M3XZ2 can adopts the normal
open contact or normal close contact of the mechanical contact switch.
Connection illustrative diagram:
92 GSK CNC Equipment Company
4.7K
achine
0V
+24V
3K
GSK928TC
Page 93
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
+24V
or
+24V
4.7K
3K
The valid signal puts through
0V
GSK928TC
Or
+24V
3K
M achine
0V
GSK928TC
Note 1: If the signal is valid, arrived the point or press the limit switch.
Ｎｏｔｅ ２： Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｎｓｉｓｔｏｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｐｕｔｓ ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈ， ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ ｖｏｌｔａｇｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ
ｂｅ ｌｏｗｅｒ ｔｈｅｎ １Ｖ． Ｗｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｔｒａｎｓｉｓｔｏｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｃｕｔｓ ｏｆｆ， ｔｈｅ ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
ｖｏｌｔａｇｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｈｉｇｈｅｒ ｔｈｅｎ ２３Ｖ．
GSK CNC Equipment Company 93
Page 94
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
7 Output interface
1 +24
14 +24
2 +24
15 0V
3 S1(No.1 step spindle rev)
16 M21/M22(No.1 user output)
4 S2(No.2 step spindle rev)
17 M23/M24(No.2 user output)
5 S3(No.3 step spindle rev)
18 M32/M33(Lubrication on/off)
6 S4(No.4 step spindle rev)
19 M10/M11(Chuck lock/unlock)
7 MSP(Spindle brake)
20 M9(Coolant stop)
8 M8(Coolant start)
21 M5(spindle stop)
9 M4(Spindle turn backward)
22 M3(spindle turn forward)
10
23
11
24
12
25 0V(Analog output)
13 0~10V(Analog output)
1. GSK928TC sends out the signal to the machine.
2. Except for the SVC signal, the other signals are driven by transistor ULN2803. The max. load
current is 200mA. When the signal is valid, the transistor puts through. The public terminal
voltage is +24V.
3. When there has the inductance load such as the relay on the machine, the spark controller
must be adopted, and it should be closes to the load (within 20cm). When there has the
capacitance load on the machine, the current limiting resistor must be connected in series.
4. Signal definition:
When the spindle motor has many kinds of speed, the S01 S02 S03 S04 bits are adopted.
By coding the S01 S02 S03 S04 bits, it can control the motor with the most 16 kinds of speed.
M21/M22: No.1 user output
M23/M24: No.1 user output
M32/M33: Lubrication on/off
M10/M11: Chuck lock/unlock
M8: Coolant start
M9: Coolant stop
M3: Spindle turn forward
M4: Spindle turn backward
M5: Spindle stop
MSP: Spindle brake
SVC: Analog signal (0~10VDC) to control the spindle rev when the frequency converter motor is
adopted on the machin
94 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 95
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
+
uput interface of
T3
5. Connection elements
Output interface:
+24V
ULN2803
0V
GSK928TC
Relay
Machine
6. M8 M9 M3 M4 M5 can be set as level control or pulse control by the bit MODM of the
parameter P12. When it is the pulse control, the time of M code (the time that the
corresponding transistor puts through) is defined by parameter .
7. S01 S02 S03 S04 M21/M22 M23/M24 M32/M33 M10/M11 MSP are only the
level control
8. MSP spindle brake scheduling:
M3 or M4
M5
MSP
T1
T2
T1 The valid time of M5 (with the pulse control) is defined by the parameter P15.
T2 The delay time from M5 signal cancel to MSP signal sendout, it is 0.2second in.
T3 the Spndle brake time is defined by the parameter P16.
9. With the level control, M10/M11( unlock), M32/M33(Lubrication off) M9 M5 are not
output.
10. SVC signal: 0~10V DC, control the output rev of the frequency convertor.
LM358
_
GSK928TC
10
0V
13
25
convertor
Frequency
I
the control voltage
Machine
GSK CNC Equipment Company 95
Page 96
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
the speeddown and reset interface
Return to the mechanical point 1
+24
DecX or DecZ
+24
X0 or Z0
GSK928T
Machine
Signal
Proximity Switch
It's low level at T1,T3
(Xdec or Zdec) of GSK928TC
Switch
NPN Proximity
Connect the proximity switch to
T3 T2 T1
Direction to return to the mechanical point
machine
Block on the
slider moves positively, the T1 part of the block
Remarks: When return to the mechanical point, the
presses the proximity switch, then the slider speeds
mechanical point when it is in T2 part (the slider
down. The width of the Ti part must be enough to
moves with the appointed lowest speed). The T2
finish speeddown (not short then 25mm). Test the
point when it is in T3 part (the front side of T3 in
width must bigger then the testing diameter of the
proximity switch. Finish returning to the mechanical
cuts off. Define if the returning to the mechanical
NPN, it puts through at T1, T3 parts. Otherwise, it
effect). The proximity switch is the normal open of
point is valid by the bit MZRO of the parameter P12.
96 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 97
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
C
speeddown, this system begins to test the point signal.
e point signal, finish returning to
set interface
Return to the mechanical point 2
+24
GSK928T
Machine
+24
DecX or DecZ
X0 or Z0
Point signal
Signal
Switch
Or Contact
It's low level at T1,
Proximity Switch
Code wheel
Sewo motor
GSK CNC Equipment Company 97
Direction to return to the mechanical point
machine
Block on the
Switch
NPN Proximity
T1
(Xdec or Zdec) of GSK928TC
Connect the proximity switch to
the speeddown and re
parameter P12.
slider moves positiv ely, the T1 part of the block
Remarks: When return to the mechanical point, the
finish speeddown (not short then 25mm). After
down. The width of the Ti part must be enough to
presses the proximity switch, then the slider speeds
mechanical point is valid by the bit MZRO of the
the mechanical point. Define if the returning to the
As soon as it finds th
Page 98
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
GSK TC Toolpost Coutroller illustrative diagram
TK4TK3TK2TK1
1
2
3
456
T1T2T3T4T5T6T7
TK8TK7TK6TK5
7
8
T8
9
GND
10
24V
＋
Toolpost Signaling
Signaling Interface
C3
Toolpost Motor
AC 50Hz 60/120W
4
3
2
1
Toolpost Motor Interface
U
V
W
PE
R3
C2
R2
C1
630V/0.1uFX3
1N4148X8
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
JF
JZ
1
2
3
4
101112
13
GSK928TC Interface
R1
RJ-2W-100HOWX3
ＧＳＫ ＴＣ Ｔｏｏｌｐｏｓｔ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｒ
U
V
W
PE
4
3
2
1
Toolpost power Interface
98 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Page 99
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
928TC(Hardware V2.0) I/O Interface Test illustrative diagram
ST
SP
R29
4.7K
BG1
8050
ESP
D4
SHL
DECX
DECZ
4.7K
4.7K
X0
Z0
+XZL
_XZL
M91
L4
L3
R6
R5
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
DB25z in
J2
XALM
ZALM
R22
R23 100
R24 100
R25 100
R26 1K
R27
100
1K
BG3
8050
BG2
8050
XPU
ZPU
XDIR
ZDIR
XEN
ZEN
R31
4.7K
R30
4.7K
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
DB15z-XZ
J4
M93
M3XZ1
M3XZ2
4.7K
R2
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
4.7K
L1
TL+
TL_
R21 4.7K
R7 4.7K
4.7K
R8
R9
4.7K M21
R10 4.7K
4.7K
R11
4.7K
4.7K
R13
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
DB15z-dj
J1
4.7K
R14
4.7K
R15
4.7K
R18 4.7K
4.7K
R20 4.7K
SVC
L5
S01
S02
M23
M33
M32R12
M11
M10
MSP
M9R16 4.7K
M8R17
M5
M4R19
M3
2
1
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
J3 DB25k out
R3
4.7K
R1
GSK CNC Equipment Company 99
Page 100
Connection GSK928TC Turning CNC System
DB15Z
GSK928TC I/O Interface illustrative diagram 1
24
22
20
18
+24
16
M3XZ1
+24
M3XZ2
R13
R39
3K
C124
104
3K
C118
104
D2.+XZL
D4.M91/M92
M3XZ1
0V
25
0V
D0.X0
2
9 TL-
2468101214
8
6
4
ESP KEY
D3.T4
0V
D1.T2
15
14
13
12
11
10
ST KEY
DB25Z
1415161718192021222324
D4
+24
D6.DecX
J10
10PIN
1
TL+
TL+
1
1
234
TL-
+24
+24
2
3
D0.T1
3
5
5
0V
AGND
D0.T1
D2.T3
4
7
6
D1.T2
D4.T5
5
9
789
D2.T3
6
D3.T4
7
10
D4.T5
O15
0V
+24
8
+24
R34
3K
C60
104
O17
KI7
SP KEY
123456789
135791113
SP
ST
ST
SP
R32
3K
C61
104
O16
KI8
KO13
VCC+24
R33
3K
C62
104
D5.SHL
+24
ESP
/INT0
+24
D7.DecZ
STSPESP
521
O19
R31
1K
D1.Z0
0V
0V
17
15
J9
26PIN
6
54321
7
D4
D5.SHL
D3.-XZL
D5.M93/M94
101112
21
19
8
9
D7.DecZ
D6.DecX
M3XZ2
23
121110
+24
0V
13
25
VCC
151413
0V
AGND
R2
R3
1K
1K
M3XZA
1617181920
D1.Z0
D0.X0
D2.+XZL
M3XZB
D3.-XZL
D4.M91/M92
O21
22
23
21
D5.M93/M94
D6.AlmX
ALMX
AGND
2524
D7.AlmZ
ALMZ
2
2
3
3
4
D0.T1
D1.T2
D2.T3
D3.T4
C19 DS104
23
9
11
D0
D4.T5
C21 DS104
C20 DS104
1
23
4O3
521
C23 DS104
C22 DS104
C24 DS104
C25 DS104
1
1
23
9
4
O4
521
215345678
16
1413121110
1
A02A13A24A35A46A57A68A7
DIR
B018B117B216B315B414B513B612B7
D7D6D5D4D3D2D1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
1
1
C78 DS104
6.2K
6.2K
RP16
RP18
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RP6
1K
1
1
23
O20
521
4
4
521
O18
U13
74HC245
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
1
1
DS104
6.2K
RP15
RP17
6.2K
+24
O6
521-4
O5
521-4
1K
RP7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
VCC
C26
C27 DS104
9
U17
74AHC245
D0D1D2D3D4D5D6
C28 DS104
C29 DS104
1
215345678
16
1413121110
9
11
DS104
C33 DS104
C32
C31 DS104
C30 DS104
1
215345678
O7
521-4
9
16
1413121110
VCCVCC
1
A02A13A24A35A46A57A68A7
DIR
B018B117B216B315B414B513B612B7
D7
100 GSK CNC Equipment Company
Loading...